SlideShare a Scribd company logo
Instruction Bulletin
Retain for future use.
Altivar®
31
Adjustable Speed Drive Controllers
Programming Manual
Altivar 31 programing
VVDED303042USR6/04 Altivar® 31 Programming Manual
06/2004 Contents
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 3
SECTION 1: INTRODUCTION Product Range ............................................................................................ 5
About This Document ................................................................................. 5
Hazard Categories and Special Symbols ................................................... 6
Product Support .......................................................................................... 6
Start-Up Overview ....................................................................................... 7
Preliminary Recommendations ................................................................... 8
Precautions ........................................................................................... 8
Starting from Line Power ....................................................................... 9
Power Up after a Manual Fault Reset or Stop Command ..................... 9
Test on a Low Power Motor or without a Motor ..................................... 9
Using Motors in Parallel ........................................................................ 9
Operation on an Impedance Grounded System .................................... 9
Programming Recommendations .......................................................... 9
Factory Settings ........................................................................................ 10
Drive Thermal Protection .......................................................................... 11
Ventilation ............................................................................................ 11
Motor Thermal Protection ......................................................................... 12
SECTION 2: PROGRAMMING Drive Keypad Display ................................................................................ 14
ATV31•••••• Controllers ....................................................................... 14
ATV31••••••A Controllers ..................................................................... 14
Key Functions ...................................................................................... 15
nSt: Freewheel Stop ............................................................................ 15
Remote Keypad Display ........................................................................... 16
Saving and Loading Configurations .................................................... 16
Accessing the Menus ................................................................................ 17
Accessing the Parameters ........................................................................ 18
bFr Parameter ..................................................................................... 18
Function Compatibility ............................................................................... 19
Logic and Analog Input Application Functions .......................................... 20
SECTION 3: MENUS Settings Menu SEt- ................................................................................... 23
Drive Control Menu drC- ........................................................................... 27
I/O Menu I-O- ............................................................................................ 31
Control Menu CtL- ..................................................................................... 34
Control Channels ................................................................................. 34
Parameter LAC .................................................................................... 35
Parameter LAC = L1 or L2 .................................................................. 36
Parameter LAC = L3 ........................................................................... 37
Reference Channel for LAC = L1 or .................................................... 39
Control Channel for LAC = L1 or L2 .................................................... 40
Reference Channel for LAC = L3 ........................................................ 41
Control Channel for LAC = L3:
CHCF = SIM, Combined Reference and Control ................................ 42
Control Channel for LAC = L3:
CHCF = SEP, Mixed Mode (Separate Reference and Control) .......... 43
Application Functions Menu FUn- ............................................................. 48
Summing Inputs .................................................................................. 54
Preset Speeds ..................................................................................... 55
+/- Speed ............................................................................................. 59
PI Regulator ........................................................................................ 62
Manual–Automatic Operation with PI Regulator ................................. 64
Brake Control ...................................................................................... 68
Management of Limit Switches ........................................................... 74
Fault Menu FLt- ......................................................................................... 76
Communication Menu COM- .................................................................... 80
Display Menu SUP- ................................................................................... 82
Altivar® 31 Programming Manual VVDED303042USR6/04
Contents 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved4
SECTION 4: MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLE-
SHOOTING
Precautions ...............................................................................................85
Routine Maintenance ................................................................................85
Normal Display ...........................................................................................85
Fault Display .............................................................................................85
Drive Controller Does Not Start, No Fault Displayed ...........................85
Clearing Faults ....................................................................................86
Faults Which Cannot Be Automatically Reset .....................................86
Faults Which Can Be Automatically Reset ..........................................87
Faults That Reset When the Fault Is Cleared .....................................88
Configuration Settings Tables ...................................................................88
Drive Controller and Customer ID .......................................................89
1st Level Adjustment Parameter ...........................................................89
Settings Menu ......................................................................................89
Drive Control Menu ..............................................................................90
I/O Menu ..............................................................................................90
Control Menu .......................................................................................90
Application Functions Menu ................................................................91
Fault Menu ...........................................................................................93
Communication Menu ..........................................................................93
Index of Parameter Codes ........................................................................94
Index of Functions .....................................................................................95
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 1: Introduction
06/2004 Product Range
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 5
SECTION 1: INTRODUCTION
PRODUCT RANGE The Altivar 31 (ATV31) family of adjustable frequency AC drive controllers is
used for controlling three-phase asynchronous motors. The controllers
range from:
• 0.25 to 3 hp (0.18 to 2.2 kW), 208/230/240 V, single-phase input
• 0.25 to 20 hp (0.18 to 15 kW), 208/230/240 V, three-phase input
• 0.5 to 20 hp (0.37 to 15 kW), 400/460/480 V, three-phase input
• 1 to 20 hp (0.75 to 15 kW), 525/575/600 V, three-phase input
Some ATV31 controllers are available with a reference potentiometer, a run
button, and a stop/reset button. These controllers are designated as
ATV31••••••A controllers throughout this manual. The symbol “•” in a catalog
number designates parts of the number that vary with the rating.
ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT This manual contains programming instructions for ATV31 drive controllers.
The following documentation is also provided with the controller:
• Altivar 31 Installation Manual, VVDED303041US
• Altivar 31 Start-Up Guide, VVDED303043US
Refer to the ATV31 Installation Manual for instructions on receiving,
inspection, mounting, installation, and wiring. Refer to the ATV31 Start-Up
Guide for instructions on bringing the drive controller into service with the
factory configuration.
Refer to the Index of Parameter Codes and the Index of Functions on
pages 94–95 of for an alphabetical index of the codes and functions
discussed in this manual.
NOTE: Throughout this manual, and on the drive keypad display, a dash
appears after menu and sub-menu codes to differentiate them from
parameter codes. For example, SEt- is a menu, but ACC is a parameter.
Section 1: Introduction VVDED303042USR6/04
Hazard Categories and Special Symbols 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved6
HAZARD CATEGORIES AND SPECIAL
SYMBOLS
The following symbols and special messages may appear in this manual or
on the equipment to warn of potential hazards.
A lightening bolt or ANSI man symbol in a “Danger” or “Warning” safety
label on the equipment indicates an electrical hazard which will result in
personal injury if the instructions are not followed.
An exclamation point symbol in a safety message in the manual indicates
potential personal injury hazards. Obey all safety messages introduced by
this symbol to avoid possible injury or death.
PRODUCT SUPPORT For support and assistance, contact the Product Support Group. The
Product Support Group is staffed from 8:00 am until 6:00 pm Eastern time to
assist with product selection, start-up, and diagnosis of product or
application problems. Emergency phone support is available 24 hours a
day, 365 days a year.
Symbol Name
Lightening Bolt
ANSI Man
Exclamation Point
DANGER
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, can result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, can result in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION
CAUTION, used without the safety alert symbol, indicates a potentially
hazardous situation which, if not avoided, can result in property damage.
Telephone 919-266-8600
Toll Free 888-Square D (888-778-2733)
E-mail drive.products.support@us.schneider-electric.com
Fax 919-217-6508
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 1: Introduction
06/2004 Start-Up Overview
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7
START-UP OVERVIEW The following procedure is an overview of the minimum steps necessary for
bringing an ATV31 drive controller into service. Refer to the ATV31
Installation Manual for the mounting, wiring, and bus voltage measurement
steps. Refer to the appropriate sections of this manual for the programming
steps.
1. Mount the drive controller. Refer to the ATV31 Installation Manual.
2. Make the following connections to the drive controller. Refer to the
ATV31 Installation Manual:
— Connect the grounding conductors.
— Connect the line supply. Ensure that it is within the voltage range of
the drive controller.
— Connect the motor. Ensure that its rating corresponds to the drive
controller’s voltage.
3. Power up the drive controller, but do not give a run command.
4. Configure bFr (motor nominal frequency) if it is other than 50 Hz. bFr
appears on the display the first time the drive controller is powered up. It
can be accessed in the drC- menu (page 27) anytime.
5. Configure the parameters in the drC- menu if the factory configuration is
not suitable. Refer to page 10 for the factory settings.
6. Configure the parameters in the I-O-, CtL-, and FUn- menus if the
factory configuration is not suitable. Refer to page 10 for the factory
settings.
7. Configure the following parameters in the SEt- menu (pages 23–27):
— ACC (acceleration) and dEC (deceleration)
— LSP (low speed when the reference is zero) and HSP (high speed
when the reference is at its maximum)
— ItH (motor thermal protection)
8. Remove power from the drive controller and follow the bus voltage
measurement procedure in the ATV31 Installation Manual. Then
connect the control wiring to the logic and analog inputs.
9. Power up the drive controller, then issue a run command via the logic
input (refer to the ATV31 Start-Up Guide).
10. Adjust the speed reference.
Section 1: Introduction VVDED303042USR6/04
Preliminary Recommendations 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved8
PRELIMINARY RECOMMENDATIONS
Precautions Before powering up and configuring the drive controller, read and observe
the following precautions.
DANGER
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
• Before powering up and configuring the drive controller, ensure that the
logic inputs are switched off (State 0) to prevent unintended starting.
• An input assigned to the run command may cause the motor to start
immediately upon exiting the configuration menus.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious
injury.
WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
• The designer of any control scheme must consider the potential failure
modes of control paths and, for certain critical control functions, provide
a means to achieve a safe state during and after a path failure.
• Examples of critical control functions are Emergency Stop and
Overtravel Stop.
• Separate or redundant control paths must be provided for critical control
functions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious
injury, or equipment damage.
CAUTION
DAMAGED EQUIPMENT
Do not operate or install any drive controller that appears damaged.
Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage.
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 1: Introduction
06/2004 Preliminary Recommendations
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 9
Starting from Line Power If you are starting the drive controller from line power, ensure that parameter
tCt is not set to trn (see page 31) and limit operations of the line contactor to
fewer than one per minute to avoid premature failure of the filter
capacitors and precharge resistors. The recommended method of control
is through inputs LI1 to LI6. The motor thermal state memory returns to zero
when line power is removed from the drive controller.
Power Up after a Manual Fault Reset or
Stop Command
If parameter tCt is at its factory setting (trn), when the drive controller is
powered up after a manual fault reset or a stop command, the forward,
reverse, and DC injection stop commands must be reset for the drive
controller to start. If they are not reset, the drive controller will display nSt
and will not start. If automatic restart is configured (parameter Atr in the FLt-
menu, see page 77) the reset is not necessary.
Test on a Low Power Motor or without a
Motor
With the factory configuration, motor phase loss detection (OPL) is active.
To check the drive controller in a test or maintenance environment without
having to switch to a motor with the same rating as the drive controller,
disable motor phase loss detection and configure the voltage/frequency
ratio (UFt) to L, constant torque (see page 29). The drive controller will not
provide motor thermal protection if the motor current is less than 0.2 times
the nominal drive current.
Using Motors in Parallel When using motors in parallel, configure the voltage/frequency ratio, UFt, to
L (constant torque) and provide an alternate means of thermal protection on
every motor. The drive controller cannot provide adequate motor thermal
protection for each motor.
Operation on an Impedance Grounded
System
When using the drive controller on a system with an isolated or impedance
grounded neutral, use a permanent insulation monitor compatible with non-
linear loads.
ATV31••••••M21 and N4 drive controllers feature built-in radio frequency
interference (RFI) filters which have capacitors to ground. These filters can
be disconnected from ground when using the drive controller on an
impedance grounded system to increase the operating life of their
capacitors. Refer to the ATV31 Installation Manual for more information.
Programming Recommendations Refer to “Start-Up Overview” on page 7 for the minimum programming steps
necessary for bringing the drive controller into service.
Use the configuration settings tables beginning on page 89 to prepare and
record the drive configuration before programming the drive controller. It is
always possible to return to the factory settings by setting the FCS
parameter to InI in the drC-, I-O-, CtL-, or FUn- menus. See pages 30, 33,
47, and 75.
When first commissioning an ATV31 drive controller for a 60 Hz system,
perform a factory parameter reset. Be sure to set bFr to 60 Hz.
We recommend using the auto-tuning function to optimize the drive
controller’s accuracy and response time. Auto-tuning measures the stator
resistance of the motor to optimize the control algorithms. See page 29.
1
Throughout this manual, the symbol “•” in a catalog number denotes the portion of the number
that varies with the drive controller rating.
Section 1: Introduction VVDED303042USR6/04
Factory Settings 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved10
FACTORY SETTINGS The ATV31 drive controller is supplied ready for use in most applications,
with the factory settings shown in Table 1.
Table 1: Factory Settings
Function Code Factory Setting
Display —
rdY with motor stopped,
motor frequency (for example, 50 Hz) with motor
running
Motor frequency bFr 50 Hz
Type of voltage/frequency
ratio
UFt
n: sensorless flux vector control for constant
torque applications
Normal stop mode Stt Stn: normal stop on deceleration ramp
Stop mode in the event of a
fault
EPL YES: freewheel stop
Linear ramps ACC, dEC 3 seconds
Low speed LSP 0 Hz
High speed HSP 50 Hz
Frequency loop gain FLG, StA Standard
Motor thermal current ItH
Nominal motor current (value depends on the
drive controller rating)
DC injection braking SdC
0.7 x nominal drive controller current for
0.5 seconds
Deceleration ramp adaptation brA
YES: automatic adaptation of the deceleration
ramp in the event of overvoltage on braking
Automatic restart Atr nO: no automatic restart after a fault
Switching frequency SFr 4 kHz
Logic inputs
LI1, LI2
2-wire transition detection control:
LI1 = forward, LI2 = reverse.
Not assigned on ATV31••••••A1
drive controllers
1
ATV31••••••A range drive controllers have a reference potentiometer, a run button, and a
stop/reset button. They are factory set for local control with the run button, the stop/reset button,
and the reference potentiometer active. Logic inputs LI1 and LI2 and analog input AI1 are
inactive (not assigned).
LI3, LI4
4 preset speeds:
speed 1 = speed reference or LSP (see page 24)
speed 2 = 10 Hz
speed 3 = 15 Hz
speed 4 = 20 Hz
LI5, LI6 Not assigned
Analog inputs
AI1
Speed reference 0–10 V.
Not assigned on ATV31••••••A1 drive controllers.
AI2 Summed speed reference input 0 ±10 V
AI3 4–20 mA, not assigned
Relays
R1
The contact opens in the event of a fault or if
power is removed from the drive controller.
R2 Not assigned
Analog output AOC 0–20 mA, not assigned
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 1: Introduction
06/2004 Drive Thermal Protection
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11
DRIVE THERMAL PROTECTION Thermal protection of the drive controller is achieved with a positive
temperature coefficient (PTC) resistor on the heatsink or power module. In
the event of an overcurrent, the drive controller trips to protect itself against
overloads. Typical tripping points are:
• Motor current is 185% of nominal drive controller current for 2 seconds
• Motor current is 150% of nominal drive controller current for 60 seconds
Ventilation The fan starts when the drive controller is powered up, but stops after
10 seconds if a run command is not received. The fan starts automatically
when the drive controller receives an operating direction and reference. It
stops a few seconds after motor speed is less than 0.2 Hz and injection
braking is completed.
1.11
1000
3000
5000
1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9
60
100
160
2
0
200
Time
(seconds)
Motor current/drive controller In
Section 1: Introduction VVDED303042USR6/04
Motor Thermal Protection 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved12
MOTOR THERMAL PROTECTION Motor thermal protection is achieved by continuous calculation of heat
energy (I2
t). The protection is available for self-cooled motors.
NOTE: The motor thermal state memory returns to zero when line power is
removed from the drive controller.
Refer to “Preliminary Recommendations” on pages 8–9 for more information
about external overload protection.
CAUTION
INADEQUATE MOTOR THERMAL PROTECTION
The use of external overload protection is required under the following
conditions:
• Starting from line power
• Running multiple motors
• Running motors rated at less than 0.2 times the nominal drive current
• Using motor switching
Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage.
10,000
1,000
100
0.7 0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5
50 Hz20 Hz10 Hz
1 Hz 3 Hz 5 Hz
Motor current/ItH
Trip time in seconds
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 2: Programming
06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 13
SECTION 2: PROGRAMMING
DANGER
UNQUALIFIED USER
• This equipment must be installed, programmed, and serviced only by
qualified personnel.
• The application of this product requires expertise in the design and
programming of control systems. Only persons with such expertise
should be allowed to program, install, alter, and apply this product.
• Qualified personnel performing diagnostics or troubleshooting that
requires electrical conductors to be energized must comply with
NFPA 70 E - Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee
Workplaces and OSHA Standards - 29 CFR Part 1910 Subpart S
Electrical.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious
injury.
Section 2: Programming VVDED303042USR6/04
Drive Keypad Display 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved14
DRIVE KEYPAD DISPLAY
ATV31•••••• Controllers
ATV31••••••A Controllers ATV31••••••A controllers have a reference potentiometer, a run button, and
a stop/reset button.
Altivar 31
ESC
ENT
RUN
ERR
CAN
Four 7-segment displays
Enters a menu or a parameter, or saves
the displayed parameter or value
Returns to the previous menu or
parameter, or increases the
displayed value
Exits a menu or parameter, or clears the
displayed value to return to the previous
stored value
Advances to the next menu or
parameter, or decreases the
displayed value
Red LED
DC bus ON
2 CANopen status LEDs
Altivar 31
RUN
ESC
ENT
STOP
RESET
RUN
ERR
CAN
Reference potentiometer:
Active if parameter Fr1 in the CtL- menu is
configured as AIP (see page 44)
Four 7-segment displays
Enters a menu or a parameter, or saves the
displayed parameter or value
Returns to the previous menu or parameter,
or increases the displayed value
Exits a menu or a parameter,
or clears the displayed value to return to the
previous stored value
Advances to the next menu or parameter, or
decreases the displayed value
STOP/RESET button
Resets faults
Stops the motor:
• If tCC (I-O- menu) is not configured as LOC,
pressing the STOP/RESET key commands a
freewheel stop.
• If tCC (I-O- menu) is configured as LOC,
stopping is on a ramp, but if injection braking
is in progress, a freewheel stop takes place.
RUN button: Starts the motor in forward
direction if parameter tCC in the I-O- menu is
configured as LOC (see page 31)
Red LED
DC bus ON
2 CANopen status LEDs
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 2: Programming
06/2004 Drive Keypad Display
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 15
Key Functions • Press and hold down (longer than 2 seconds) the or keys to
scroll through the data quickly.
• Pressing or does not store the selection.
• To store the selection, press the key.The display flashes when a
value is stored.
A normal display with no fault present and no run command shows:
• The value of one of the display parameters (see page 82). The default
display is motor frequency, for example 43.0. In current limiting mode,
the display flashes.
• init: Initialization sequence
• rdY: Drive ready
• dcb: DC injection braking in progress
• nSt: Freewheel stop. See the following section.
• FSt: Fast stop
• tUn: Auto-tuning in progress
If a fault is present, the display flashes.
nSt: Freewheel Stop If the display shows the code nSt, one of the following conditions is
indicated:
1. With the factory configuration, when the drive controller is powered up
after a manual fault reset or stop command, the forward, reverse, and
DC injection stop commands must be reset for the drive controller to
start. If they are not reset, the drive controller will display nSt and will not
start. If automatic restart is configured, the reset is not necessary.
2. If the reference channel or the control channel is assigned to Modbus or
CANopen (see page 34), the drive controller will display nSt on power
up and remain stopped until the communication bus sends a command.
3. If a forward or reverse run command is present when the drive controller
is powered up and the drive controller is set for 3-wire control or for
2-wire control with “trn” transition (see page 31), the drive controller will
display nSt and will not run until the run command is cycled and a valid
speed reference is given.
ENT
Section 2: Programming VVDED303042USR6/04
Remote Keypad Display 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved16
REMOTE KEYPAD DISPLAY The optional remote keypad display is a local control unit that can be wall-
mounted on the door of an enclosure. It has a cable with connectors for
connection to the drive serial link (refer to the manual supplied with the
display). The remote keypad display has the same display and
programming buttons as the drive controller, with the addition of a switch to
lock access to the menu and three buttons for commanding the drive
controller:
• FWD/REV commands the direction of rotation.
• RUN commands the motor to run.
• STOP/RESET commands the motor to stop or resets a fault. Pressing
the STOP/RESET button once stops the motor; pressing it a second
time stops DC injection braking if it is configured.
In order for the remote keypad display to be active, the tbr parameter in the
COM- menu must remain at the factory setting, 19.2 (19,200 bps, see
page 80).
NOTE: Password protection has priority over the access locking switch. See
page 84.
Placing the access locking switch in the locked position also prevents the
drive settings from being accessed via the drive controller keypad. When
the remote keypad display is disconnected, if the access locking
switch is in the locked position, the drive controller keypad also
remains locked.
Saving and Loading Configurations Up to four complete configurations can be stored in the remote keypad
display and transferred to other drive controllers of the same rating. Four
different operations for the same device can also be stored on the terminal.
See the SCS and FCS parameters in the drC-, I-O-, CtL-, or FUn- menus.
See pages 30, 33, 47, and 75.
ESC
ENT
RUNFWD
REV
STOP
RESET
4-character
display
Connector
Access locking switch:
• Positions: settings and display are accessible
(SEt- and SUP- menus)
• Position: all menus can be accessed
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 2: Programming
06/2004 Accessing the Menus
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 17
ACCESSING THE MENUS
For added convenience, some parameters can be accessed in more than
one menu. For example, return to factory settings (FCS) and saving the
configuration (SCS) are available in multiple menus.
NOTE: Throughout this guide, a dash appears after menu codes to
differentiate them from parameter codes. For example, SEt- is a menu, but
ACC is a parameter.
XXX
bFr
FLt-
SUP-
CON-
SEt-
FUn-
CtL-
I-O-
drC-
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ENT
ENT
ENT
ESC
ENT
ESC
ENT
ESC
ENT
ESC
ENT
ESC
ENT
ESC
ENT
ESC
ENT
ESC
Displays drive controller status (variable, see page 15)
Motor frequency (The factory setting is only visible
the first time the drive is powered up. See page 18.)
Drive control (page 27)
Faults (page 76)
Communication (page 80)
Monitoring (page 82)
Settings (page 23)
Menus
I/O (page 31)
Control (page 34)
Functions (page 48)
Power-up
Section 2: Programming VVDED303042USR6/04
Accessing the Parameters 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved18
ACCESSING THE PARAMETERS The following figure illustrates how to access parameters and assign their
values. To store the parameter value, press the key. The display
flashes when a value is stored.
All of the menus are drop-down type menus. Once you have reached the
last parameter in a list, press the key to return to the first parameter.
From the first parameter in the list, press the key to jump to the last
parameter.
If you have modified a parameter in a menu and you return to that menu
without accessing another menu in the meantime, you will be taken directly
to the parameter you last modified. See the illustration below. If you have
accessed another menu or have restarted the drive controller since the
modification, you will be taken to the first parameter in the menu. See the
illustration above.
bFr Parameter Motor frequency, bFr, can only be modified when the drive controller is
stopped and not receiving a run command.
ENT
ACC 15.0
ENT
ESC
ENT
ESC
26.0 26.0
ESC
dEC
ENT
SEt-
Menu Parameter Value Assignment
The display
flashes when a
value is stored.
Next Parameter
ENT
ESC
1st
nth
last
Menu
ENT
ESC
1st
nth
last
Menu
Code Description
Adjustment
range
Factory
setting
bFr Motor frequency 50 or 60 Hz 50 Hz
This is the first parameter displayed when the drive controller is first powered up.
bFr can be modified at any time in the drC- menu.
Modifying this parameter also modifies the values of the following parameters: HSP
(page 24), Ftd (page 27), FrS (page 28), and tFr (page 30).
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 2: Programming
06/2004 Function Compatibility
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 19
FUNCTION COMPATIBILITY Automatic restart, catch on the fly, and reverse direction are only available
as described below:
• Automatic restart is only available in 2-wire control (tCC = 2C and
tCt = LEL or PFO, see page 31).
• Catch on the fly is only available in 2-wire control (tCC = 2C and
tCt = LEL or PFO, see page 31). It is deactivated if automatic DC
injection braking is configured as DC (AdC = Ct, see page 53).
• Reverse direction is only available on ATV31••••••A controllers if local
control is active (tCC = LOC, see page 31).
The choice of application functions is limited by the number of I/O available
and by the fact that some functions are incompatible with one another as
illustrated in the figure below. Functions which are not listed in the figure are
fully compatible. If there is an incompatibility between functions, the first
function configured will prevent the others from being configured.
Stop functions have priority over run commands. Speed references via logic
command have priority over analog references.
Summinginputs
+/-Speed1
1
Excluding a special application with reference channel Fr2 (see pages 39 and 41).
Managementoflimitswitches
Presetspeeds
PIregulator
Jogoperation
Brakesequence
DCinjectionstop
Faststop
Freewheelstop
Summing inputs
+/- Speed 1
Management of limit
switches
Preset speeds 
PI regulator
Jog operation  
Brake sequence
DC injection stop
Fast stop
Freewheel stop  
Incompatible functions Compatible functions Not applicable
 Functions which cannot be active at the same time. The arrow points to
the function that has priority.
Section 2: Programming VVDED303042USR6/04
Logic and Analog Input Application Functions 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved20
LOGIC AND ANALOG INPUT
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
Tables 2–5 list the functions that can be assigned to the logic and analog
inputs and their factory assignments. A single input can activate several
functions at the same time. For example, reverse and second ramp can be
assigned to one input. When more than one function is assigned to an input,
ensure that the functions are compatible. Use the LIA- and AIA- sub-menus
of the SUP- menu (see page 84) to display the functions assigned to the
inputs and to check their compatibility.
Table 2: Logic Inputs
Function Code See Page:
Factory Setting
ATV31•••••• ATV31••••••A
Not assigned — — LI5–LI6
LI1–LI2
LI5–LI6
Forward — — LI1
2 preset speeds PS2 56 LI3 LI3
4 preset speeds PS4 56 LI4 LI4
8 preset speeds PS8 56 — —
16 preset speeds PS16 57 — —
2 preset PI references Pr2 66 — —
4 preset PI references Pr4 66 — —
+ speed USP 61 — —
- speed dSP 61 — —
Jog operation JOG 58 — —
Ramp switching rPS 50 — —
Switching for 2nd
current limit LC2 71 — —
Fast stop via logic input FSt 51 — —
DC injection via logic input dCI 51 — —
Freewheel stop via logic input nSt 52 — —
Reverse rrS 31 LI2 —
External fault EtF 78 — —
RESET (fault reset) rSF 77 — —
Forced local mode FLO 80 — —
Reference switching rFC 45 — —
Control channel switching CCS 46 — —
Motor switching CHP 72 — —
Limiting of forward motion (limit switch) LAF 74 — —
Limiting of reverse motion (limit switch) LAr 74 — —
Fault inhibit InH 79 — —
Table 3: Analog Inputs
Function Code See Page:
Factory Setting
ATV31•••••• ATV31••••••A
Not assigned — — AI3 AI1 - AI3
Reference 1 Fr1 44 AI1
AIP
(potentiometer)
Reference 2 Fr2 44 —
Summing input 2 SA2 54 AI2 AI2
Summing input 3 SA3 54 — —
PI regulator feedback PIF 66 — —
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 2: Programming
06/2004 Logic and Analog Input Application Functions
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 21
Table 4: Analog and Logic Outputs
Function Code See Page: Factory Setting
Not assigned — — AOC/AOV
Motor current OCr 32 —
Motor frequency rFr 32 —
Motor torque OLO 32 —
Power supplied by the drive controller OPr 32 —
Drive fault (logic data) FLt 32 —
Drive running (logic data) rUn 32 —
Frequency threshold reached (logic data) FtA 32 —
High speed (HSP) reached (logic data) FLA 32 —
Current threshold reached (logic data) CtA 32 —
Frequency reference reached (logic data) SrA 32 —
Motor thermal threshold reached (logic data) tSA 32 —
Brake sequence (logic data) bLC 32 —
Table 5: Relays
Function Code See Page: Factory Setting
Not assigned — — R2
Drive fault FLt 32 R1
Drive running rUn 32 —
Frequency threshold reached FtA 32 —
High speed (HSP) reached FLA 32 —
Current threshold reached CtA 32 —
Frequency reference reached SrA 32 —
Motor thermal threshold reached tSA 32 —
Brake sequence bLC 32 —
Section 2: Programming VVDED303042USR6/04
Logic and Analog Input Application Functions 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved22
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus
06/2004 Settings Menu SEt-
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 23
SECTION 3: MENUS
SETTINGS MENU SEt-
The parameters in the SEt- menu can be modified with the drive controller
running or stopped. However, we recommend making modifications to the
settings with the drive controller stopped.
DANGER
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Ensure that changes to the operating settings do not present any danger,
especially when making adjustments while the drive controller is running
the motor.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious
injury.
CAUTION
MOTOR OVERHEATING
• This drive controller does not provide direct thermal protection for the
motor.
• Use of a thermal sensor in the motor may be required for protection at
all speeds or loading conditions.
• Consult the motor manufacturer for the thermal capability of the motor
when operated over the desired speed range.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
rPI
LFrSEt-
ACC
SdS
ENT
ENT
ESC
ESC
ENT
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ENT
ESC
ENT
ESC
Speed reference from the remote
keypad
Scale factor for SPd1–SPd3
parameters
Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04
Settings Menu SEt- 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved24
Code Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting
LFr1
Speed reference from the remote keypad. 0 to HSP
This parameter appears if LCC = YES (page 46) or if Fr1/Fr2 = LCC (page 44), and if the remote keypad is online. In this case,
LFr can also be accessed via the drive controller keypad.
LFr is reset to 0 when the drive controller is powered down.
rPI1
Internal PI regulator reference See page 62. 0.0 to 100% 0
ACC Acceleration ramp time 0.1 to 999.9 s 3 s
Defined as the time it takes for the motor to go from 0 Hz to FrS (nominal frequency, see page 28).
AC2 2nd acceleration ramp time See page 50. 0.1 to 999.9 s 5 s
dE2 2nd
deceleration ramp time See page 50. 0.1 to 999.9 s 5 s
dEC
Deceleration ramp time 0.1 to 999.9 s 3 s
Defined as the time it takes for the motor to go from FrS (nominal frequency, see page 28) to 0 Hz.
Ensure that dEC is not set too low for the load.
tA1
Start of custom acceleration ramp, rounded as a percentage
of total ramp time (ACC or AC2)
See page 49. 0 to 100 10%
tA2
End of custom acceleration ramp, rounded as a percentage of
total ramp time (ACC or AC2)
See page 49. 0 to (100-tA1) 10%
tA3
Start of custom deceleration ramp, rounded as a percentage
of total ramp time (dEC or dE2)
See page 49. 0 to 100 10%
tA4
End of custom deceleration ramp, rounded as a percentage of
total ramp time (dEC or dE2)
See page 49. 0 to (100-tA3) 10%
LSP
Low speed 0 to HSP 0 Hz
Minimum reference
HSP
High speed LSP to tFr bFr
Maximum reference. Ensure that this setting is suitable for the motor and the application.
ItH
Current used for motor thermal protection. 0.2 to 1.5 In2 Varies with drive
controller rating
Set ItH to the full-load amperes (FLA) indicated on the motor nameplate.
Refer to OLL on page 78 if you wish to suppress motor thermal protection.
1
Also accessible in the SUP- menu.
2
In is the nominal drive controller current indicated on the drive controller nameplate.
SEt-
These parameters appear regardless of how the other menus have been configured.
They only appear in the Settings menu.
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. To facilitate programming,
they can also be accessed and adjusted from the menu where the corresponding function is found. A detailed description of
these functions can be found on the indicated pages.
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus
06/2004 Settings Menu SEt-
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 25
Code Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting
UFr
IR compensation or voltage boost 0 to 100% 20
If UFt (page 29) = n or nLd, UFr is IR compensation.
If UFt = L or P, UFr is voltage boost.
Used to optimize torque at very low speed. Increase UFr if the torque is insufficient.
To avoid operating instability, ensure that the value of UFr is not too high for a warm motor.
NOTE: Modifying UFt (page 29) will cause UFr to return to the factory setting (20%).
FLG
Frequency loop gain 1 to 100% 20
This parameter can only be accessed if UFt (page 29) = n or nLd.
FLG adjusts the speed ramp based on the inertia of the driven load.
If the value is too low, the response time is longer. If the value is too high, operating instability can result.
StA
Frequency loop stability 1 to 100% 20
This parameter can only be accessed if UFt (page 29) = n or nLd.
After a period of acceleration or deceleration, StA adapts the return to a steady state to the dynamics of the machine.
If the value is too low, overspeed or operating instability can result. If the value is too high, the response time is longer.
SLP
Slip compensation 0 to 150% 100
This parameter can only be accessed if UFt (page 29) = n or nLd.
SLP adjusts slip compensation for fine tuning of speed regulation.
If the slip setting < actual slip, the motor is not rotating at the correct speed in steady state.
If the slip setting > actual slip, the motor is overcompensated and the speed is unstable.
IdC
Level of DC injection braking current activated via a logic input
or selected as a stop mode.1 See page 51.
0 to In (In is the
nominal drive
controller current
indicated on the
nameplate.)
0.7 In
tdC Total DC injection braking time selected as a stop mode.1 See page 51. 0.1 to 30 s 0.5 s
tdC1 Automatic DC injection time See page 53. 0.1 to 30 s 0.5 s
SdC1 Level of automatic DC injection current See page 53. 0 to 1.2 In 0.7 In
tdC2 2nd automatic DC injection time See page 53. 0 to 30 s 0 s
SdC2 2nd
level of DC injection current See page 53. 0 to 1.2 In 0.5 In
1 These settings are not related to the Automatic DC Injection function.
SEt-
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
-10
10
20
30
40
0
50
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
-10
10
20
30
40
0
50
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
-10
10
20
30
40
0
50
t
Hz
t
Hz
t
HzFLG low FLG correct FLG high
In this case,
increase FLG
In this case,
reduce FLG
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 t
-10
10
20
30
40
0
50
Hz
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 t
-10
10
20
30
40
0
50
Hz
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 t
-10
10
20
30
40
0
50
HzStA low StA correct StA high
In this case,
increase StA
In this case, reduce
StA
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. To facilitate programming,
they can also be accessed and adjusted from the menu where the corresponding function is found. A detailed description of
these functions can be found on the indicated pages.
Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04
Settings Menu SEt- 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved26
Code Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting
JPF
Skip frequency 0 to 500 0 Hz
JPF prevents prolonged operation at a frequency range of ± 1 Hz around JPF. This function avoids a critical speed which leads
to resonance. Setting the function to 0 renders it inactive.
JF2
2nd skip frequency 0 to 500 0 Hz
JF2 prevents prolonged operation at a frequency range of ± 1 Hz around JF2. This function avoids a critical speed which leads to
resonance. Setting the function to 0 renders it inactive.
JGF Jog operating frequency See page 58. 0 to 10 Hz 10 Hz
rPG PI regulator proportional gain See page 66. 0.01 to 100 1
rIG PI regulator integral gain See page 66. 0.01 to 100/s 1/s
FbS PI feedback multiplication coefficient See page 66. 0.1 to 100 1
PIC Reversal of the direction of correction of the PI regulator See page 66. nO - YES nO
rP2 2nd preset PI reference See page 66. 0 to 100% 30%
rP3 3rd
preset PI reference See page 66. 0 to 100% 60%
rP4 4th
preset PI reference See page 66. 0 to 100% 90%
SP2 2nd preset speed See page 57. 0 to 500 Hz 10 Hz
SP3 3rd
preset speed See page 57. 0 to 500 Hz 15 Hz
SP4 4th
preset speed See page 57. 0 to 500 Hz 20 Hz
SP5 5th preset speed See page 57. 0 to 500 Hz 25 Hz
SP6 6th
preset speed See page 57. 0 to 500 Hz 30 Hz
SP7 7th
preset speed See page 57. 0 to 500 Hz 35 Hz
SP8 8th preset speed See page 57. 0 to 500 Hz 40 Hz
SP9 9th
preset speed See page 57. 0 to 500 Hz 45 Hz
SP10 10th
preset speed See page 57. 0 to 500 Hz 50 Hz
SP11 11th preset speed See page 57. 0 to 500 Hz 55 HZ
SP12 12th
preset speed See page 57. 0 to 500 Hz 60 Hz
SP13 13th
preset speed See page 57. 0 to 500 Hz 70 Hz
SP14 14th preset speed See page 57. 0 to 500 Hz 80 Hz
SP15 15th
preset speed See page 57. 0 to 500 Hz 90 Hz
SP16 16th
preset speed See page 57. 0 to 500 Hz 100 Hz
CLI
Current limit 0.25 to 1.5 In1
1.5 In
Used to limit the torque and the temperature rise of the motor.
CL2 2nd current limit See page 71. 0.25 to 1.5 In 1.5 In
tLS
Low speed operating time 0 to 999.9 s 0 (no time limit)
After operation at LSP for a defined period, a motor stop is requested automatically. The motor restarts if the frequency reference
is greater than LSP and if a run command is still present.
rSL Restart error threshold (wake-up threshold) See page 67. 0 to 100% 0
UFr2 IR compensation, motor 2 See page 73. 0 to 100% 20
FLG2 Frequency loop gain, motor 2 See page 73. 1 to 100% 20
StA2 Stability, motor 2 See page 73. 1 to 100% 20
SLP2 Slip compensation, motor 2 See page 73. 0 to 150% 100%
1
In is the nominal drive controller current indicated on the drive controller nameplate.
SEt-
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. To facilitate programming,
they can also be accessed and adjusted from the menu where the corresponding function is found. A detailed description of
these functions can be found on the indicated pages.
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus
06/2004 Drive Control Menu drC-
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 27
DRIVE CONTROL MENU drC-
With the exception of tUn, drive control parameters can only be modified
when the drive controller is stopped and no run command is present. This
menu can be accessed with the access locking switch on the remote
keypad display in the position. Drive controller performance can be
optimized by:
• Setting the drive control parameters to the values on the motor
nameplate
• Performing an auto-tune operation (on a standard asynchronous motor)
Code Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting
Ftd
Motor frequency threshold above which the relay contact (R1 or R2) closes,
or output AOV = 10 V. R1, R2, or dO must be assigned to FtA.
0 to 500 Hz bFr
ttd
Motor thermal state threshold above which the relay contact (R1 or R2) closes,
or output AOV = 10 V. R1, R2, or dO must be assigned to tSA.
0 to 118% 100%
Ctd
Motor current threshold beyond which the relay contact (R1 or R2) closes,
or output AOV = 10 V. R1, R2, or dO must be assigned to CtA.
0 to 1.5 In1
In1
SdS
Scale factor for display parameter SPd1/SPd2/SPd3 (see SUP- menu on
page 83)
0.1 to 200 30
Used to scale a value (such as motor speed) in proportion to the output frequency rFr.
If SdS ≤ 1, SPd1 is displayed (possible definition = 0.01).
If 1 < SdS ≤ 10, SPd2 is displayed (possible definition = 0.1).
If SdS > 10, SPd3 is displayed (possible definition = 1).
If SdS > 10 and SdS x rFr > 9999:
Display of Spd3 = (to 2 decimal places).
For example, if SdS x rFr equals 24,223, the display shows 24.22.
If SdS > 10 and SdS x rFr > 65535, the display shows 65.54.
Example: Display motor speed for a 4-pole motor,
1500 rpm at 50 Hz (synchronous speed):
SdS = 30
SPd3 = 1500 at rFr = 50 Hz
SFr
Switching frequency See page 30. 2.0 to 16 kHz 4 kHz
This parameter can also be accessed in the drC- menu.
1 In is the nominal drive controller current indicated on the drive controller nameplate.
SEt-
SdS x rFr
1000
ESC
ENT
bFr
ENT ESC
ENTESC
FCS
ESC
ESC
drC-
tAI
Standard motor frequency
Return to factory settings/restore
configuration
Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04
Drive Control Menu drC- 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved28
Code Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting
bFr Motor frequency 50 or 60 Hz 50
This parameter modifies the presets of the following parameters: HSP (page 24), Ftd (page 27), FrS (page 28), and tFr
(page 30).
UnS
Nominal motor voltage indicated on the nameplate
Varies with drive
controller rating
Varies with drive
controller rating
ATV31•••M2: 100 to 240 V
ATV31•••M3X: 100 to 240 V
ATV31•••N4: 100 to 500 V
ATV31•••S6X: 100 to 600 V
FrS
Nominal motor frequency indicated on the nameplate 10 to 500 Hz 50 Hz
The ratio must not exceed the following values:
ATV31•••M2: 7
ATV31•••M3X: 7
ATV31•••N4: 14
ATV31•••S6X: 17
NOTE: Changing the setting of bFr to 60 Hz also changes the setting of FrS to 60 Hz.
nCr Nominal motor current indicated on the nameplate 0.25 to 1.5 In1 Varies with drive
controller rating
nSP
Nominal motor speed indicated on the nameplate 0 to 32760 rpm
Varies with drive
controller rating
0 to 9999 rpm, then 10.00 to 32.76 krpm
If the nameplate indicates synchronous speed and slip (in Hz or as a percentage) instead of nominal speed, calculate nominal
speed as follows:
Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x
or
Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x (50 Hz motors)
or
Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x (60 Hz motors)
COS Motor power factor indicated on the nameplate 0.5 to 1
Varies with drive
controller rating
1
In is the nominal drive controller current indicated on the drive controller nameplate.
drC-
UnS (in volts)
FrS (in Hz)
100 - slip as a%
100
50 - slip in Hz
50
60 - slip in Hz
60
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus
06/2004 Drive Control Menu drC-
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 29
Code Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting
rSC
Cold state stator resistance See below. nO
nO: Function inactive. For applications that do not require high performance or do not tolerate automatic auto-tuning (passing a
current through the motor) each time the drive is powered up.
InIt: Activates the function. Used to improve low-speed performance, whatever the thermal state of the motor.
XXXX: Value of cold state stator resistance used, in mΩ.
NOTE: We recommended that you activate this function for lifting and handling applications. This function should only
be activated when the motor is cold.
When rSC = InIt, parameter tUn is forced to POn. At the next run command, the stator resistance is measured with an auto-tune.
The value of parameter rSC then changes to this measured stator resistance value (XXXX) and is maintained at that value; tUn
remains forced to POn. Parameter rSC remains at InIt as long as the stator resistance measurement has not been performed.
Value XXXX can be forced or modified using the keys.
tUn
Motor control auto-tuning See below. nO
Before performing an auto-tune, ensure that all the drive control parameters (UnS, FrS, nCr, nSP, COS) are configured correctly.
Parameter tUn can be modified with the drive controller running; however, an auto-tune will only be performed if no run or
braking command is present.
nO: Auto-tuning is not performed.
YES: Auto-tuning is performed as soon as possible, then the parameter automatically switches to dOnE or, in the event of a
fault, to nO. The tnF fault is displayed if tnL = YES (see page 79).
dOnE: Auto-tuning is completed and the measured stator resistance will be used to control the motor.
rUn: Auto-tuning is performed each time a run command is sent.
POn: Auto-tuning is performed each time the controller is powered up.
LI1 to LI6: Auto-tuning is performed when the logic input assigned to this function transitions from 0 to 1.
Note:
tUn is forced to POn if rSC is any value other than nO.
Auto-tuning will only be performed if no run or braking command is present. If a freewheel stop or fast stop function is assigned
to a logic input, this input must be set to 1 (active at 0). Auto-tuning may last for 1 to 2 seconds. Wait for the display to change to
dOnE or nO. Interrupting auto-tuning may result in an auto-tuning fault (see page 86) and cause the motor to be improperly
tuned. During auto-tuning, the motor operates at nominal current.
tUS
Auto-tuning status
(status information only, cannot be modified)
See below. tAb
tAb: The default stator resistance value is used to control the motor.
PEnd: Auto-tuning has been requested but not yet performed.
PrOG: Auto-tuning is in progress.
FAIL: Auto-tuning has failed.
dOnE: Auto-tuning is complete. The stator resistance measured by the auto-tuning function is used to control the motor.
Strd: Auto-tuning is complete. The cold state stator resistance is used to control the motor (rSC must be other than nO).
UFt
Selection of the voltage/frequency ratio See below. n
L: Constant torque (for motors connected in parallel or special motors)
P: Variable torque (pump and fan applications)
n: Sensorless flux vector control (for constant torque applications)
nLd: Energy savings (for variable torque applications not requiring high dynamics. This behaves in a similar way to the P ratio
at no load and the n ratio with load.)
drC-
L
UnS
FrS
n
P
Voltage
Frequency
Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04
Drive Control Menu drC- 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved30
Code Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting
nrd
Random switching frequency See below. YES
This function randomly modulates the switching frequency to reduce motor noise.
YES: Frequency with random modulation
nO: Fixed frequency
SFr
Switching frequency1
2.0 to 16 kHz 4 kHz
Adjust this setting to reduce audible motor noise. If the switching frequency is set to a value higher than 4 kHz, in the event of
excessive temperature rise, the drive controller automatically reduces the switching frequency. It increases it again when the
temperature returns to normal. If switching frequency is set above the factory setting (4 kHz), refer to the ATV31 Installation
Manual for derating curves.
tFr
Maximum output frequency 10 to 500 Hz 60 Hz
The factory setting is 60 Hz, or 72 Hz if bFr is set to 60 Hz.
SSL
Suppression of the speed loop filter See below. nO
nO: The speed loop filter is active (prevents the reference from being exceeded).
YES: The speed loop filter is suppressed. In position control applications, this setting reduces the response time, but the
reference may be exceeded.
SCS
Saving the configuration2
See below. nO
nO: Function inactive
StrI: Saves the current configuration (but not the result of auto-tuning) to EEPROM. SCS automatically switches to nO as
soon as the save is performed. Use this function to keep another configuration in reserve, in addition to the current configuration.
The drive controller is factory set with the current configuration and the backup configuration both initialized to the factory
configuration.
If the remote keypad display is connected to the drive controller, up to four additional settings are available: FIL1, FIL2,
FIL3, and FIL4. Use these selections to save up to four configurations in the remote keypad display’s EEPROM memory.
SCS automatically switches to nO as soon as the save is performed.
FCS
Return to factory settings/Restore configuration2
See below. nO
nO: Function inactive
rECI: Replaces the current configuration with the backup configuration previously saved by SCS (SCS set to Strl). rECI is
visible only if the backup configuration has been saved. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action is performed.
InI: Replaces the current configuration with the factory settings. FCS automatically switches to nO as soon as this action is
performed.
If the remote keypad display is connected to the drive controller, up to four additional selections are available corresponding to
backup files loaded in the remote keypad display's EEPROM memory: FIL1, FIL2, FIL3, and FIL4. These
selections replace the current configuration with the corresponding backup configuration in the remote keypad display. FCS
automatically changes to nO as soon as this action is performed.
Note: If nAd briefly appears on the display once the parameter has switched to nO, the configuration transfer is not possible
and has not been performed (because the controller ratings are different, for example). If ntr briefly appears on the display
once the parameter has switched to nO, a configuration transfer error has occurred and the factory settings must be restored
using InI. In both cases, check the configuration to be transferred before trying again.
NOTE: For rECI, InI, and FIL1 to FIL4 to take effect, you must press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s.
1 This parameter can also be accessed in the Settings menu, SEt-. See page 23.
2
SCS and FCS can be accessed in several configuration menus, but their settings affect all menus and parameters as a whole.
drC-
0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5
-10
10
20
30
40
0
50
0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5
-10
10
20
30
40
0
50
t
Hz
t
Hz
SSL = nO SSL = YES
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus
06/2004 I/O Menu I-O-
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 31
I/O MENU I-O-
I/O parameters can only be modified when the drive controller is stopped
and no run command is present. This menu can be accessed with the
access locking switch on the remote keypad display in the position.
ESC
ENT
tCC
ENT ESC
ENTESC
FCS
ESC
ESC
I-O-
Return to factory settings/restore
configuration
Code Description Factory Setting
tCC
Type of control: 2-wire, 3-wire, or local
2C
ATV31••••••A: LOC
Control configuration:
2C = 2-wire control
3C = 3-wire control
LOC = Local control, for ATV31••••••A controllers only. This option is not available if parameter LAC = L3 (see page 44).
2-wire control (maintained contact): The state of the input (open or closed) controls running or stopping.
Wiring example:
LI1: forward
LIx: reverse
3-wire control (pulse control): A forward or reverse pulse is sufficient to control startup. A stop pulse is sufficient to control
stopping.
Wiring example:
LI1: stop
LI2: forward
LIx: reverse
NOTE: To change the assignment of tCC, press the ENT key for 2 s. This causes the following functions to return to their factory
setting: rrS, tCt, and all functions affecting logic inputs.
tCt
Type of 2-wire control (parameter only accessible if tCC = 2C) trn
LEL: If the forward or reverse input is high when the drive controller is powered up, the drive controller will start the motor. If
both inputs are high on power up, the drive controller will run forward.
trn: The forward or reverse input must transition from low to high before the drive controller will start the motor. If the forward
or reverse input is high when the drive controller is powered up, the input must be cycled before the drive controller will start the
motor.
PFO: Same as LEL, but the forward input has priority over the reverse input. If forward is activated while the controller is
running in reverse, the drive controller will run in the forward direction.
rrS
Reverse operation via logic input
if tCC = 2C: LI2
if tCC = 3C: LI3
if tCC = LOC: nO
If rrS = nO, reverse operation is not assigned to a logic input. Reverse operation may still be commanded by another means,
such as negative voltage on AI2, a serial link command, or the remote keypad.
nO: Not assigned
LI2: Logic input LI2, can be accessed if tCC = 2C LI5: Logic input LI5
LI3: Logic input LI3 LI6: Logic input LI6
LI4: Logic input LI4
I-O-
24 V LI1 LIx
ATV31 Controller
24 V LI1 LI2 LIx
ATV31 Controller
2-wire/3-wire control
Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04
I/O Menu I-O- 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved32
Code Description Factory Setting
CrL3
CrH3
Value for low speed (LSP) on input AI3, can be set between 0 and 20 mA
Value for high speed (HSP) on input AI3, can be set between 4 and 20 mA
4 mA
20 mA
These two parameters are used to configure the input for 0–20 mA, 4–20 mA, 20–4 mA, etc.
AO1t
Configuration of the analog output 0A
0A: 0–20 mA configuration (use terminal AOC)
4A: 4–20 mA configuration (use terminal AOC)
10U: 0–10 V configuration (use terminal AOV)
dO
Analog/logic output AOC/AOV nO
nO: Not assigned
OCr: Motor current. 20 mA or 10 V corresponds to twice the nominal drive controller current.
rFr: Motor frequency. 20 mA or 10 V corresponds to the maximum frequency tFr (page 30).
Otr: Motor torque. 20 mA or 10 V corresponds to twice the nominal motor torque.
OPr: Power supplied by the drive. 20 mA or 10 V corresponds to twice the nominal drive controller power.
Making the following assignments changes the analog output to a logic output (refer to the ATV31 Installation Manual for more
information). With these assignments, configure AOt to 0 A.
FLt: Drive fault
rUn: Drive running
FtA: Frequency threshold reached (Ftd parameter in the SEt- menu, page 27)
FLA: High speed (HSP) reached
CtA: Current threshold reached (Ctd parameter in the SEt- menu, page 27)
SrA: Frequency reference reached
tSA: Motor thermal threshold reached (ttd parameter in the SEt- menu, page 27)
bLC: Brake sequence (status information only. bLC can be only be activated or deactivated from the FUn- menu, see page 70).
APL: Loss of 4–20 mA signal, even if LFL = nO (page 79)
The logic output state is 1 (24 V) when the selected assignment is active, except for FLt which is in state 1 if the drive controller
is not faulted.
r1
Relay R1 FLt
nO: Not assigned
FLt: Drive fault
rUn: Drive running
FtA: Frequency threshold reached (Ftd parameter in the SEt- menu, page 27)
FLA: High speed (HSP) reached
CtA: Current threshold reached (Ctd parameter in the SEt- menu, page 27)
SrA: Frequency reference reached
tSA: Motor thermal threshold reached (ttd parameter in the SEt- menu, page 27)
APL: Loss of 4–20 mA signal, even if LFL = nO (page 79)
The relay is powered up when the selected assignment is active, except for FLt which is powered up if the drive controller is not
faulted.
r2
Relay R2 nO
nO: Not assigned
FLt: Drive fault
rUn: Drive running
FtA: Frequency threshold reached (Ftd parameter in the SEt- menu, page 27)
FLA: High speed (HSP) reached
CtA: Current threshold reached (Ctd parameter in the SEt- menu, page 27)
SrA: Frequency reference reached
tSA: Motor thermal threshold reached (ttd parameter in the SEt- menu, page 27)
bLC: Brake sequence (status information only. bLC can be only be activated or deactivated from the FUn- menu, see page 70).
APL: Loss of 4–20 mA signal, even if LFL = nO (page 79)
The relay is powered up when the selected assignment is active, except for FLt which is powered up if the drive controller is not
faulted.
I-O-
AI 3
(mA)
0
LSP
HSP
CrL3 CrH3 20
AI 3
(mA)
0
LSP
HSP
CrL3CrH3
(20 mA)(4 mA)
Frequency Frequency
Example:
20–4 mA
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus
06/2004 I/O Menu I-O-
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 33
Code Description Factory Setting
SCS
Saving the configuration1
nO
nO: Function inactive
StrI: Saves the current configuration (but not the result of auto-tuning) to EEPROM. SCS automatically switches to nO as
soon as the save is performed. Use this function to keep another configuration in reserve, in addition to the current configuration.
The drive controller is factory set with the current configuration and the backup configuration both initialized to the factory
configuration.
If the remote keypad display is connected to the drive controller, up to four additional settings are available: FIL1, FIL2,
FIL3, and FIL4. Use these selections to save up to four configurations in the remote keypad display’s EEPROM memory.
SCS automatically switches to nO as soon as the save is performed.
FCS
Return to factory settings/restore configuration1
nO
nO: Function inactive
rECI: Replaces the current configuration with the backup configuration previously saved by SCS (SCS set to Strl). rECI is
visible only if the backup configuration has been saved. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action is performed.
InI: Replaces the current configuration with the factory settings. FCS automatically switches to nO as soon as this action is
performed.
If the remote keypad display is connected to the drive controller, up to four additional selections are available corresponding to
backup files loaded in the remote keypad display's EEPROM memory: FIL1, FIL2, FIL3, and FIL4. These
selections replace the current configuration with the corresponding backup configuration in the remote keypad display. FCS
automatically changes to nO as soon as this action is performed.
Note: If nAd briefly appears on the display once the parameter has switched to nO, the configuration transfer is not possible
and has not been performed (because the controller ratings are different, for example). If ntr briefly appears on the display
once the parameter has switched to nO, a configuration transfer error has occurred and the factory settings must be restored
using InI. In both cases, check the configuration to be transferred before trying again.
NOTE: For rECI, InI, and FIL1 to FIL4 to take effect, you must press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s.
1
SCS and FCS can be accessed in several configuration menus, but their settings affect all menus and parameters as a whole.
I-O-
Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04
Control Menu CtL- 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved34
CONTROL MENU CTL-
Control parameters can only be modified when the drive controller is
stopped and no run command is present. This menu can be accessed with
the access locking switch on the remote keypad display in the position.
Control Channels Control commands, such as forward and reverse, and speed reference
commands can be sent to the drive controller from the sources specified in
Table 6. ATV31 drive controllers allow you to assign control and reference
sources to separate control channels (Fr1, Fr2, Cd1, or Cd2, see
pages 44–45) and to switch between them. For example, you might assign
LCC to reference channel 1 and CAn to reference channel 2 and switch
between the two reference sources. It is also possible to use separate
sources for control and reference commands. This is called mixed mode
operation. These functions are explained in detail in the sections beginning
on page 36.
ESC
ENT
LAC
ENT ESC
ENTESC
FCS
ESC
ESC
CtL-
Fr1
Return to factory settings/restore
configuration
Table 6: Control and Reference Sources
Control Sources (CMD) Reference Sources (rFr)
tEr: Terminal (LI)
AI1,
AI2,
AI3:
Terminal
LOC:
Drive keypad (RUN/STOP) on
ATV31••••••A controllers only
AIP: Potentiometer on ATV31••••••A only
LCC: Remote keypad display (RJ45 socket) LCC:
Drive keypad (on ATV31•••••• and
ATV31••••••A controllers) or remote
keypad display
Mdb: Modbus (RJ45 socket) Mdb: Modbus (RJ45 socket)
CAn: CANopen (RJ45 socket) CAn: CANopen (RJ45 socket)
WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
The stop buttons on ATV31••••••A drive controllers and on the remote
keypad display can be programmed to not have priority. To retain stop key
priority, set PSt to YES (see page 47).
Failure to follow this instruction can result in death, serious injury,
or equipment damage.
Function access level
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus
06/2004 Control Menu CtL-
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 35
Parameter LAC Use parameter LAC (page 44) in the CtL- menu to select levels of function
access and to set the control and reference sources.
1. LAC = L1: Level 1—access to standard functions. Control and reference
commands come from one source. See “Parameter LAC = L1 or L2” on
page 36.
2. LAC = L2: Level 2—access to all of the level 1 functions, plus the
advanced functions listed below. Control and reference commands
come from one source. See “Parameter LAC = L1 or L2” on page 36.
— +/- Speed (motorized potentiometer)
— Brake control
— Switching for 2nd current limit
— Motor switching
— Management of limit switches
3. LAC = L3: Level 3—access to all of the level 2 functions. Control and
reference commands can come from separate sources. See “Parameter
LAC = L3” on page 37.
Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04
Control Menu CtL- 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved36
Parameter LAC = L1 or L2 If parameter LAC is set to L1 or L2, the control and reference commands
come from one source. The possible control and reference sources, and the
settings that specify them, are:
• Control and reference via the input terminals or the drive keypad display
in forced local (see FLO on page 80)
• Control and reference via the Modbus serial link
• Control and reference via the CANopen serial link
• Control and reference via the remote keypad display (see LCC on
page 46)
NOTE: Modbus or CANopen is selected online by writing the appropriate
control word (refer to the protocol-specific documentation).
The diagram below illustrates the order of priority when more than one
control and reference source is specified. In the diagram, information flows
from left to right. At step 1, LCC is not set to YES to enable the remote
keypad display, so the drive keypad display is selected as the control and
reference source. At steps 2–4, Modbus, CANopen, and forced local control
are not set to YES, so the drive keypad display remains the selected
source. The order of priority, therefore, is forced local, CANopen, Modbus,
and the drive keypad display or the remote keypad display. For example, if
forced local mode were enabled, it would have priority over any other
setting. Similarly, if CANopen were enabled, it would have priority over any
other setting except for FLO. Refer to the diagrams on pages 39 and 40 for
more detail.
• On ATV31•••••• drive controllers with the factory configuration, control
and reference commands come from the control terminals.
• On ATV31••••••A drive controllers with the factory configuration, control
commands come from the drive keypad display and reference
commands come from a summation of the reference potentiometer and
AI1 on the control terminals.
• With a remote keypad display, if LCC = YES (see page 46), control and
reference commands come from the remote keypad display. The
reference frequency is set by parameter LFr in the SEt- menu
(see page 24).
A
B
C
A
B
C
A C
Legend:
Modbus
CANopen
FLO
LCC
1 2 3 4
The drive keypad
display is selected as
the control and
reference source.
Remote Keypad
Display
Forced Local Mode
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus
06/2004 Control Menu CtL-
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 37
Parameter LAC = L3 If parameter LAC is set to L3:
• The control and reference channels can be combined (parameter
CHCF = SIM, see page 45), or
• The control and reference channels can be separate
(parameter CHCF = SEP, see page 45)
Parameter CHCF = SIM The following figure illustrates combined control and reference sources:
Use parameter rFC (page 45) to select reference channel Fr1 or Fr2, or to
configure a logic input or a control word bit for remote switching between the
two channels. Refer to the diagram on page 42.
rFC
Selection of reference channel
1 (Fr1, page 44)
The control commands are
from the same source.
Selection of reference channel
2 (Fr2, page 44)
The control commands are
from the same source.
Control and reference from
Fr1
Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04
Control Menu CtL- 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved38
Parameter CHCF = SEP The following figures illustrate separate control and reference channels
(parameter CHCF = SEP).
Separate Reference Channels:
Use parameter rFC (page 45) to select reference channel Fr1 or Fr2, or to
configure a logic input or a control word bit for remote switching between the
two channels.
Separate Control Channels:
Use parameter CCS (page 46) to select control channel Cd1 or Cd2, or to
configure a logic input or a control word bit for remote switching between the
two channels.
rFC
Selection of reference channel
1 (Fr1, page 44)
Selection of reference channel
2 (Fr2, page 44)
Reference from Fr1
CCS
Selection of control channel 1
(Cd1, page 45).
Selection of control channel 2
(Cd2, page 45)
Control from Cd1
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus
06/2004 Control Menu CtL-
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 39
Reference Channel for LAC = L1 or L2
nO
SA2
AI1
AI2
AI3
AIP
(SP1)
SP2
SP16
nO
nO
rFC
LI
LCC
FLO
Modbus
CANopen
HSP
FrH rFr
LSP
SA3
AI1
AI2
AI3
AIP nO
nO
nO
nO
nO
YES
AI1
AI2
AI3
UPdt
Fr1
UPdH
AI1
AI2
AI3
AIP
UPdt
Fr2
UPdH
nO
B
A
AI1
AI2
AI3
AIP
ACC DEC
AC2 DE2
PIF
PIF
LFr
LI
A
B
C
A
XXX
nO
SA2
AI1
AI2
AI3
AIP
(SP1)
SP2
SP16
nO
nO
rFC
LI
LCC
FLO
Modbus
CANopen
HSP
FrH rFr
LSP
SA3
AI1
AI2
AI3
AIP nO
nO
nO
nO
nO
YES
AI1
AI2
AI3
UPdt
Fr1
UPdH
AI1
AI2
AI3
AIP
UPdt
Fr2
UPdH
nO
B
A
AI1
AI2
AI3
AIP
ACC DEC
AC2 DE2
PIF
PIF
LFr
LI
A
B
C
A
XXX
Preset speeds
PI function
(see page 62)
Jog
operation
PI not assigned
PI assigned
Channel1Channel2
Remote
keypad
display
Forced local mode
Ramps
The black square represents
the factory setting of parameter xxx.
Function accessible if LAC = L2
Modbus or CANopen is selected online by writing the
appropriate control word (see the protocol-specific
documentation).
Note: If the +/- speed command is configured
(Fr1 = UPdt or UPdH), summing inputs SA2/SA3
are not active.
Legend:
+
speed
-
speed
+
speed
-
speed
Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04
Control Menu CtL- 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved40
Control Channel for LAC = L1 or L2 The settings of parameters FLO, LCC, and the selection of Modbus or
CANopen protocol determine both the reference and control channels. The
order of priority is FLO, CANopen, Modbus, and LCC.
LI LI
LI
LCC
CANopen
Modbus
LOC
RUN
STOP
RUN
STOP
FWD / REV
STOP
STOP
3C
2C
YES
nO
tCC
FLO
PSt
YES
nO
nO
CMD
A
B
C
A
XXX
(STOP priority)
Remote keypad display
Remote keypad
display
ATV31••••••A
drive keypad
ATV31••••••A
drive keypad
Forward
Reverse
STOP
Legend:
The black square represents
the factory setting of parameter xxx.
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus
06/2004 Control Menu CtL-
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 41
Reference Channel for LAC = L3
(SP1)
SP2
SP16
nO
nO
rFC
LI
FLO
HSP
FrH rFr
LSP
SA3
AI1
AI2
AI3
AIP
nO
nO
nO
nO
AI1
AI2
AI3
B
A
UPdt
Fr1
UPdH
AI1
AI2
AI3
AIP
UPdt
Fr2
UPdH
nO
AI1
AI2
AI3
Mdb
LCC
AIP
CAn
ACC DEC
AC2 DE2
PIF
LI
Mdb
CAn
PIF
Mdb
LCC
CAn
Mdb
LCC
CAn
nO
SA2
AI1
AI2
AI3
AIP
LFr
LFr
LFr
LFr
LFr
Mdb
LCC
CAn
FLOC
AI1
AI2
AI3
AIP
LCC
LI
A
B
C
A
XXX
Preset speeds
PI function
(see page 62)
Jog
operation
PI not assigned
Remote
keypad
display
Forced local mode
Ramps
PI assigned
Remote
keypad
display
Legend:
Channel1Channel2
Note: If the +/- speed command is configured (Fr1 = UPdt or
UPdH), summing inputs SA2/SA3 are not active.
Remote
keypad
display
Remote
keypad
display
Remote
keypad
display
+
speed
-
speed
The black square represents
the factory setting of parameter xxx.
+
speed
-
speed
Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04
Control Menu CtL- 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved42
Control Channel for LAC = L3:
CHCF = SIM, Combined Reference and
Control
If CHCF is set to SIM (see page 45), parameters Fr1, Fr2, FLO, and FLOC
determine both the reference and control source. For example, if the
reference is via the analog input on the terminal block, control is via the logic
input on the terminal block.
UPdt
Fr1
UPdH
AI1
AI2
AI3
AIP
LI
LI
Mdb
LCC
CAn
rFC
SEP
FLO
SIM
nO
LI
PSt
YES
nO
FLOC
AI1
AI2
AI3
AIP
CHCF
LCC
UPdt
Fr2
UPdH
nO
AI1
AI2
AI3
AIP
LI
Mdb
LCC
CAn
CMD
RUN
STOP
RUN / STOP
FWD / REV
RUN
STOP
RUN / STOP
FWD / REV
(RUN / STOP)
(RUN / STOP
FWD / REV
STOP
STOP
A
B
C
A
XXX
The black square represents
the factory setting of parameter xxx.
Legend:
(STOP has priority)
Forced local
mode
Remote keypad
display
Remote keypad
display
Remote keypad
display
Remote keypad
display
ATV31•••A
drive keypad
ATV31•••A
drive keypad
ATV31•••A
drive keypad
ATV31•••A
drive keypad
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus
06/2004 Control Menu CtL-
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 43
Control Channel for LAC = L3:
CHCF = SEP, Mixed Mode (Separate
Reference and Control)
Parameters FLO and FLOC are common to reference and control. For
example, if the reference in forced local mode is via the analog input on the
terminal block, control in forced local mode is via the logic input on the
terminal block.
tEr
Cd1
LOC
LCC
LI
LI
Mdb
RUN
STOP
RUN / STOP
FWD / REV
(RUN / STOP)
(RUN / STOP
FWD / REV)
STOP
STOP
RUN
STOP
RUN / STOP
FWD / REV
CAn
CCS
SEP
LI
FLO
SIM
nO
PSt
YES
nO
LI
FLOC
AI1
AI2
AI3
AIP
CHCF
LCC
tEr
Cd2
LOC
LI
Mdb
LCC
CAn
CMD
A
B
C
A
XXX
(STOP has priority)
Forced local mode
The black square represents
the factory setting of parameter xxx.
Forward
Reverse
STOP
Remote keypad
display
ATV31•••A
drive keypad
Legend:
Remote keypad
display
ATV31•••A
drive keypad
Remote keypad
display
ATV31•••A
drive keypad
Remote keypad
display
ATV31•••A
drive keypad
Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04
Control Menu CtL- 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved44
Refer to the function compatibility table on page 19. It is not possible to
configure incompatible control functions. The first function configured will
prevent any functions that are incompatible with it from being configured.
Code Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting
LAC
Function access level See below. L1
L1: Level 1—access to standard functions.
L2: Level 2—access to the level 1 functions plus the following advanced functions in the FUn- menu:
• +/- speed
• Brake control
• Switching for second current limit
• Motor switching
• Management of limit switches
L3: Level 3—access to all of the level 2 functions plus mixed mode operation.
Assigning L3 to LAC restores parameters Fr1 (below), Cd1 (page 45), CHCF (page 45), and tCC (page 31) to their factory
settings (on ATV31••••••A drive controllers, tCC is reset to 2C).
If LAC is set to L3, you must restore the factory setting with parameter FCS (page 47) to set LAC back to L1 or to change it to L2.
If LAC is set to L2, you must restore the factory setting with parameter FCS to set LAC back to L1.
If LAC is set to L2, you can change LAC to L3 without using parameter FCS.
NOTE: In order to change the assignment of LAC, you must press and hold down the ENT key for 2 seconds.
Fr1
Configuration of reference 1 See below.
AI1
AIP for ATV31••••••A
AI1: Analog input AI1
AI2: Analog input AI2
AI3: Analog input AI3
AIP: Potentiometer (ATV31••••••A)
If LAC = L2 or L3, the following additional assignments are possible:
UPdt: + speed/- speed via LI1
UpdH: + speed/- speed via on the drive keypad display (ATV31 or ATV31••••••A) or on the remote keypad display. For
operation, display the frequency rFr (see page 83).1
If LAC = L3, the following additional assignments are possible:
LCC: Reference via the remote keypad display, LFr parameter in the SEt- menu page 24.
Ndb: Reference via Modbus
CAn: Reference via CANopen
Fr2
Configuration of reference 2 See below. nO
nO: Not assigned
AI1: Analog input AI1
AI2: Analog input AI2
AI3: Analog input AI3
AIP: Potentiometer (ATV31••••••A only)
If LAC = L2 or L3, the following additional assignments are possible:
UPdt: + speed/- speed via LI1
UpdH:+ speed/- speed via on the drive keypad display (ATV31 or ATV31••••••A) or on the remote keypad display. For
operation, display the frequency rFr (see page 83).1
If LAC = L3, the following additional assignments are possible:
LCC: Reference via the remote keypad display, LFr parameter in the SEt- menu page 24.
Ndb: Reference via Modbus
CAn: Reference via CANopen
1
Only one of the UPdt/UPdH assignments is permitted on each reference channel.
CtL-
r
r
r
r
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus
06/2004 Control Menu CtL-
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 45
Code Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting
rFC
Reference switching See below. Fr1
Use parameter rFC to select channel Fr1 or Fr2, or to configure a logic input or a control bit for remote switching of Fr1 or Fr2.
Fr1: Reference = Reference 1
Fr2: Reference = Reference 2
LI1: Logic input LI1
LI2: Logic input LI2
LI3: Logic input LI3
LI4: Logic input LI4
LI5: Logic input LI5
LI6: Logic input LI6
If LAC = L3, the following additional assignments are possible:
C111: Bit 11 of the Modbus control word
C112: Bit 12 of the Modbus control word
C113: Bit 13 of the Modbus control word
C114: Bit 14 of the Modbus control word
C115: Bit 15 of the Modbus control word
C211: Bit 11 of the CANopen control word
C212: Bit 12 of the CANopen control word
C213: Bit 13 of the CANopen control word
C214: Bit 14 of the CANopen control word
C215: Bit 15 of the CANopen control word
The reference can be switched with the drive controller running.
Fr1 is active when the logic input or control word bit is in state 0.
Fr2 is active when the logic input or control word bit is in state 1.
CHCF
Mixed mode (separate control and reference channels) See below. SIM
CHCF can be accessed if LAC = L3.
SIN: Combined control and reference channels
SEP: Separate control and reference channels
Cd1
Configuration of control channel 1 See below.
tEr
LOC for
ATV31••••••A
Cd1 can be accessed if CHCF = SEP and LAC = L3.
tEr: Terminal block control
LOC: Drive keypad display control (ATV31••••••A only)
LCC: Remote keypad display control
Ndb: Control via Modbus
CAn: Control via CANopen
Cd2
Configuration of control channel 2 See below. Mdb:
Cd2 can be accessed if CHCF = SEP and LAC = L3.
tEr: Terminal block control
LOC: Drive keypad display control (ATV31••••••A only)
LCC: Remote keypad display control
Ndb: Control via Modbus
CAn: Control via CANopen
CtL-
These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04
Control Menu CtL- 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved46
Code Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting
CCS
Control channel switching See below. Cd1
CCS can be accessed if CHCF = SEP and LAC = L3. Use parameter CCS to select channel Cd1 or Cd2, or to configure a logic
input or a control bit for remote switching of Cd1 or Cd2.
Cd1: Control channel = Channel 1
Cd2: Control channel = Channel 2
LI1: Logic input LI1
LI2: Logic input LI2
LI3: Logic input LI3
LI4: Logic input LI4
LI5: Logic input LI5
LI6: Logic input LI6
C111: Bit 11 of the Modbus control word
C112: Bit 12 of the Modbus control word
C113: Bit 13 of the Modbus control word
C114: Bit 14 of the Modbus control word
C115: Bit 15 of the Modbus control word
C211: Bit 11 of the CANopen control word
C212: Bit 12 of the CANopen control word
C213: Bit 13 of the CANopen control word
C214: Bit 14 of the CANopen control word
C215: Bit 15 of the CANopen control word
Channel 1 is active when the input or control word bit is in state 0.
Channel 2 is active when the input or control word bit is in state 1.
COp
Copy channel 1 to channel 2. (The copy is possible only in this direction.) See below. nO
COP can be accessed if LAC = L3.
nO: No copy
SP: Copy reference
Cd: Copy control
ALL: Copy control and reference
If channel 2 is controlled via the terminal block, channel 1 control is not copied.
If channel 2 reference is set via AI1, AI2, AI3, or AIP, channel 1 reference is not copied.
The reference copied is FrH (before the ramp) unless the channel 2 reference is set via +/- speed. In this case, the reference
copied is rFr (after ramp).
NOTE: Copying the control and/or the reference may change the direction of rotation.
LCC
Control via the remote keypad display See below. nO
LCC can only be accessed if the drive controller is equipped with a remote keypad display, and if LAC = L1 or L2.
nO: Function inactive
YES: Enables control of the drive controller with the STOP/RESET, RUN, and FWD/REV buttons on the remote keypad
display. The speed reference is given by parameter LFr in the SEt- menu. Only the freewheel, fast stop, and DC injection stop
commands remain active on the terminal block.
If the remote keypad display is not connected, the drive controller will lock on an SLF fault.
CtL-
These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus
06/2004 Control Menu CtL-
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 47
Code Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting
PSt
Stop priority See below. YES
PSt gives priority to the STOP key on the drive keypad display (ATV31••••••A only) or on the remote keypad display, regardless
of the control channel selected (terminal block or communication bus). If set to nO, the active control channel has priority. If the
active control channel is the local or remote keypad display, the stop button retains priority, regardless of the setting of PSt.
NOTE: To change the assignment of PSt, you must press and hold down the ENT key for 2 seconds
nO: Function inactive
YES: STOP key priority
rOt
Direction of operation See below. dFr
Direction of operation allowed for the RUN key on the drive keypad display (ATV31••••••A only).
dFr: Forward
drS: Reverse
bOt: On ATV31•••••• drive controllers, both directions are authorized; on ATV31••••••A controllers, only the forward direction is
possible.
SCS
Saving the configuration1
See below. See below.
nO: Function inactive
StrI: Saves the current configuration (but not the result of auto-tuning) to EEPROM. SCS automatically switches to nO as
soon as the save is performed. Use this function to keep another configuration in reserve, in addition to the current configuration.
The drive controller is factory set with the current configuration and the backup configuration both initialized to the factory
configuration.
If the remote keypad display is connected to the drive controller, up to four additional settings are available: FIL1, FIL2,
FIL3, and FIL4. Use these selections to save up to four configurations in the remote keypad display’s EEPROM memory.
SCS automatically switches to nO as soon as the save is performed.
FCS
Return to factory settings/Restore configuration1
See below. See below.
nO: Function inactive
rECI: Replaces the current configuration with the backup configuration previously saved by SCS (SCS set to Strl). rECI is
visible only if the backup configuration has been saved. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action is performed.
InI: Replaces the current configuration with the factory settings. FCS automatically switches to nO as soon as this action is
performed.
If the remote keypad display is connected to the drive controller, up to four additional selections are available corresponding to
backup files loaded in the remote keypad display's EEPROM memory: FIL1, FIL2, FIL3, and FIL4. These
selections replace the current configuration with the corresponding backup configuration in the remote keypad display. FCS
automatically changes to nO as soon as this action is performed.
Note: If nAd briefly appears on the display once the parameter has switched to nO, the configuration transfer is not possible
and has not been performed (because the controller ratings are different, for example). If ntr briefly appears on the display
once the parameter has switched to nO, a configuration transfer error has occurred and the factory settings must be restored
using InI. In both cases, check the configuration to be transferred before trying again.
NOTE: For rECI, InI, and FIL1 to FIL4 to take effect, you must press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s.
1
SCS and FCS can be accessed in several configuration menus, but their settings affect all menus and parameters as a whole.
CtL-
WARNING
DISABLED STOP COMMAND
Disabling the stop key on the drive keypad display or the remote keypad display will prevent
the drive controller from stopping when the stop key is pressed. An external stop command
must be installed to stop the motor.
Failure to follow this instruction can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.
Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04
Application Functions Menu FUn- 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved48
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MENU FUN-
Application function parameters can only be modified when the drive
controller is stopped and with no run command present. On the remote
keypad display, this menu can be accessed with the access locking switch
in the position.
Some functions in this menu have numerous parameters. To simplify
programming and to minimize scrolling, these functions are grouped into
sub-menus. Like menus, sub-menus are identified by a dash. For example,
LIA- is a sub-menu, but LIn is a parameter.
It is not possible to configure incompatible application functions. The first
function configured will prevent any functions that are incompatible with it
from being configured. Refer to the function compatibility table on page 19.
ENT
ESC
rPC-
ENT ENT
ESC
ENT
ESCESC
FCS
ESC
ENT
ESC
ENT
ESC
SA1-
ESC
FUn-
Sub-menu
Sub-menu
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus
06/2004 Application Functions Menu FUn-
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 49
Sub-menu Parameter Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting
rPC- Ramp adjustment
rPt
Ramp type
Defines the shape of the acceleration and deceleration ramps.
LIn
LIn: Linear
S: S ramp
U: U ramp
CUS: Customized
S ramps
The curve coefficient is fixed,
with t2 = 0.6 x t1
with t1 = set ramp time.
The curve coefficient is fixed,
with t2 = 0.5 x t1
with t1 = set ramp time.
tA1: Can be set between 0 and 100% (of ACC or AC2)
tA2: Can be set between 0 and (100% - tA1) (of ACC or AC2)
tA3: Can be set between 0 and 100% (of dEC or dE2)
tA4: Can be set between 0 and (100% - tA3) (of dEC or dE2)
tA1
Start of CUS-type acceleration ramp rounded as a
percentage of total ramp time (ACC or AC2).
0 to 100% 10%
FUn-
HSP
t
0
t2
t1
f (Hz)
HSP
t
0
t2
t1
f (Hz)
HSP
t
0
tA1 tA2 tA3 tA4
ACC or AC2
f (Hz)
HSP
t
0
dEC or dE2
f (Hz)
HSP
t
0
t2
t1
f (Hz)
HSP
t
0
t2
t1
f (Hz)
U ramps
Customized ramps
These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04
Application Functions Menu FUn- 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved50
Sub-menu Parameter Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting
rPC-
(continued)
tA2
End of CUS-type acceleration ramp rounded as a
percentage of total ramp time (ACC or AC2)
0 to (100% - tA1) 10%
tA3
Start of CUS-type deceleration ramp rounded as a
percentage of total ramp time (dEC or dE2)
0 to 100% 10%
tA4
End of CUS-type deceleration ramp as a percentage of total
ramp time (dEC or dE2)
0 to (100% - tA3) 10%
ACC
dEC
Acceleration and deceleration ramp times1
0.1 to 999.9 s 3 s
Acceleration ramp time for the motor to go from 0 Hz to FrS (parameter in the drC- menu, see page 28).
Deceleration ramp time for the motor to go from FrS to 0 Hz. Ensure that the value of dEC is not set too low
for the load.
rPS
Ramp switching See below. nO
This function remains active regardless of the control channel.
nO: Not assigned
LI1: Logic input LI1
LI2: Logic input LI2
LI3: Logic input LI3
LI4: Logic input LI4
LI5: Logic input LI5
LI6: Logic input LI6
If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible:
Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
ACC and dEC are enabled when the logic input or control word bit is in state 0.
AC2 and dE2 are enabled when the logic input or control word bit is in state 1.
Frt
Ramp switching threshold 0 to 500 Hz 0
The second ramp is switched if the value of Frt is not equal to 0 and the output frequency is greater than Frt.
Setting Frt to 0 deactivates it.
Ramp switching threshold can be combined with switching via a logic input or a control word bit as follows:
AC2
2nd
acceleration ramp time1
:
Enabled via logic input (rPS) or frequency threshold (Frt).
0.1 to 999.9 s 5 s
dE2
2nd
deceleration ramp time1
:
Enabled via logic input (rPS) or frequency threshold (Frt).
0.1 to 999.9 s 5 s
brA
Deceleration ramp adaptation See below. YES
Activating this function automatically adapts the deceleration ramp if it has been set at too low a value for the
inertia of the load.
nO: Function inactive
YES: Function active
brA is incompatible with applications requiring positioning on a ramp or the use of a braking resistor.
brA is forced to nO if brake control (bLC) is assigned (page 70).
1
Can also be accessed in the Settings menu, SEt-. See page 23.
FUn-
LI or bit Frequency Ramp
0
0
1
1
<Frt
>Frt
<Frt
>Frt
ACC, dEC
AC2, dE2
AC2, dE2
AC2, dE2
These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus
06/2004 Application Functions Menu FUn-
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 51
Sub-menu Parameter Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting
StC- Stop modes
Stt
Normal stop type See below. RMP
Type of stop executed when the run command disappears or a stop command appears.
rNP: Follow ramp
FSt: Fast stop
nSt: Freewheel stop
dCI: DC injection stop
FSt
Fast stop via logic input See below. nO
nO: Not assigned
LI1: Logic input LI1
LI2: Logic input LI2
LI3: Logic input LI3
LI4: Logic input LI4
LI5: Logic input LI5
LI6: Logic input LI6
If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible:
Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Fast stop is activated when the state of the logic input changes to 0 or the control word bit changes to 1.
Fast stop is a stop on the deceleration reduced by the coefficient specified by parameter dCF. If the logic
input falls back to state 1 and the run command is still active, the motor will only restart if 2-wire control is
configured (tCC = 2C and tCt = LEL or PFO, see page 31). Otherwise, a new run command must be sent.
dCF
Coefficient for dividing the deceleration ramp time for fast
stopping.
0, 1 to 10 4
This parameter only appears if FST is assigned. Ensure that the reduced ramp is not too low for the load.
The value 0 corresponds to the minimum ramp.
dCI
DC injection via logic input See below. nO
nO: Not assigned
LI1: Logic input LI1
LI2: Logic input LI2
LI3: Logic input LI3
LI4: Logic input LI4
LI5: Logic input LI5
LI6: Logic input LI6
If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible:
Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Braking is activated when the state of the logic input or control word bit is 1.
IdC
Level of DC injection braking current activated via logic
input or selected as stop mode 1, 2 0 to In 3
0.7 In 3
After 5 seconds, the injection current is peak limited at 0.5 Ith.
tdC
Total DC injection braking time when dCI is selected as the
normal stop type (see Stt above). 1, 2 0.1 to 30 s 0.5 s
1
Can also be accessed in the Settings menu, SEt-. See page 23.
2 These settings are not related to the automatic DC injection function.
3
In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the ATV31 Installation Manual and on the drive controller nameplate.
FUn-
These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04
Application Functions Menu FUn- 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved52
Sub-menu Parameter Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting
StC-
(continued)
nSt
Freewheel stop via logic input nO
nO: Not assigned
LI1: Logic input LI1
LI2: Logic input LI2
LI3: Logic input LI3
LI4: Logic input LI4
LI5: Logic input LI5
LI6: Logic input LI6
Freewheel stop is activated when the logic input is at state 0. If the input returns to state 1 and the run
command is still active, the motor will only restart if 2-wire control is configured. Otherwise, a new run
command must be sent.
FUn-
WARNING
NO HOLDING TORQUE
• DC injection braking does not provide holding torque at zero speed.
• DC injection braking does not function during a loss of power or during
a drive controller fault.
• When required, use a separate brake for holding torque.
EXCESSIVE DC INJECTION BRAKING
• Application of DC injection braking for long periods of time can cause
motor overheating and damage.
• Protect the motor from extended periods of DC injection braking.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious
injury, or equipment damage.
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus
06/2004 Application Functions Menu FUn-
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 53
Sub-menu Parameter Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting
AdC- Automatic DC injection. See page 51.
AdC
Automatic DC injection
(at the end of the ramp)
See below. YES
nO: No injection
YES: DC injection for an adjustable period
Ct: Continuous DC injection
NOTE: If this parameter is set to Yes or Ct, DC current is injected even if a run command has not been sent.
The parameter can be accessed with the drive controller running.
tdC1 Automatic injection time 1
0.1 to 30 s 0.5 s
SdC1
Level of automatic DC injection current 1
0 to 1.2 In 2
0.7 In 2
Note: Ensure that the motor will withstand this current without overheating.
tdC2 2nd
automatic DC injection time 1
0 to 30 s 0 s
SdC2
2nd
level of automatic DC injection current 1
0 to 1.2 In 2
0.5 In 2
NOTE: Ensure that the motor will withstand this current without overheating.
1
Can also be accessed in the Settings menu, SEt-. See page 23.
2
In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the ATV31 Installation Manual and on the drive controller nameplate.
FUn-
AdC SdC2 Operation
YES x
Ct ≠ 0
Ct = 0
Run command
Speed
t
SdC1
SdC2
tdC1 tdC1 + tdC2
I
t
SdC1
I
t
SdC1
SdC2
tdC1
I
t
0
t
1
0
These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04
Application Functions Menu FUn- 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved54
Summing Inputs
Refer to the diagrams on pages 39 and 41.
Sub-menu Parameter Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting
SAI-
Summing inputs
Can be used to sum one or two inputs with reference Fr1.
SA2
Summing input 2 See below. AI2
nO: Not assigned
AI1: Analog input AI1
AI2: Analog input AI2
AI3: Analog input AI3
AIP: Potentiometer (ATV31••••••A drive controllers only)
If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible:
Ndb: Reference via Modbus
CAn: Reference via CANopen
LCC: Reference via the remote keypad display, LFr parameter in the SEt- menu page 24.
SA3
Summing input 3 See below. nO
nO: Not assigned
AI1: Analog input AI1
AI2: Analog input AI2
AI3: Analog input AI3
AIP: Potentiometer (ATV31••••••A drive controllers only)
If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible:
Ndb: Reference via Modbus
CAn: Reference via CANopen
LCC: Reference via the remote keypad display (LFr parameter in the SEt- menu. See page 24.)
FUn-
SA2
SA3
Fr1
NOTE: AI2 is an input, ± 10 V, which can allow a subtraction
by summing a negative signal.
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus
06/2004 Application Functions Menu FUn-
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 55
Preset Speeds Parameter PSS, preset speeds, allows 2, 4, 8, or 16 preset speeds,
requiring 1, 2, 3, or 4 logic inputs respectively.
The preset speeds must be assigned in the following order: PS2, then PS4,
then PS8, then PS16.
Refer to the following table for combining inputs to activate the various
preset speeds:
16 speeds
LI (PS16)
8 speeds
LI (PS8)
4 speeds
LI (PS4)
2 speeds
LI (PS2)
Speed reference
0 0 0 0 Reference 1
1
See the diagrams on page 39 and page 41: Reference 1 = (SP1).
0 0 0 1 SP2
0 0 1 0 SP3
0 0 1 1 SP4
0 1 0 0 SP5
0 1 0 1 SP6
0 1 1 0 SP7
0 1 1 1 SP8
1 0 0 0 SP9
1 0 0 1 SP10
1 0 1 0 SP11
1 0 1 1 SP12
1 1 0 0 SP13
1 1 0 1 SP14
1 1 1 0 SP15
1 1 1 1 SP16
Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04
Application Functions Menu FUn- 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved56
Sub-menu Parameter Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting
PSS- Preset speeds
PS2
2 preset speeds See below.
If tCC = 2C: LI3
If tCC = 3C: nO
If tCC = LOC: LI3
Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function.
nO: Not assigned
LI1: Logic input LI1
LI2: Logic input LI2
LI3: Logic input LI3
LI4: Logic input LI4
LI5: Logic input LI5
LI6: Logic input LI6
If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible:
Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
PS4
4 preset speeds See below.
If tCC = 2C: LI4
If tCC = 3C: nO
If tCC = LOC: LI4
Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function.
NOTE: Ensure that PS2 has been assigned before assigning PS4.
nO: Not assigned
LI1: Logic input LI1
LI2: Logic input LI2
LI3: Logic input LI3
LI4: Logic input LI4
LI5: Logic input LI5
LI6: Logic input LI6
If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible:
Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
PS8
8 preset speeds See below.
nO
Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function.
NOTE: Ensure that PS4 has been assigned before assigning PS8.
nO: Not assigned
LI1: Logic input LI1
LI2: Logic input LI2
LI3: Logic input LI3
LI4: Logic input LI4
LI5: Logic input LI5
LI6: Logic input LI6
If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible:
Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
FUn-
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus
06/2004 Application Functions Menu FUn-
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 57
Sub-menu Parameter Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting
PS16
16 preset speeds See below. nO
Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function.
NOTE: Ensure that PS8 has been assigned before assigning PS16.
nO: Not assigned
LI1: Logic input LI1
LI2: Logic input LI2
LI3: Logic input LI3
LI4: Logic input LI4
LI5: Logic input LI5
LI6: Logic input LI6
If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible:
Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
SP2 2nd
preset speed 1
0.0 to 500.0 Hz 10 Hz
SP3 3rd
preset speed 1
0.0 to 500.0 Hz 15 Hz
SP4 4th preset speed 1 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 20 Hz
SP5 5th
preset speed 1
0.0 to 500.0 Hz 25 Hz
SP6 6th
preset speed 1
0.0 to 500.0 Hz 30 Hz
SP7 7th preset speed 1 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 35 Hz
SP8 8th
preset speed 1
0.0 to 500.0 Hz 40 Hz
SP9 9th
preset speed 1
0.0 to 500.0 Hz 45 Hz
SP10 10th preset speed 1 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 50 Hz
SP11 11th
preset speed 1
0.0 to 500.0 Hz 55 Hz
SP12 12th
preset speed 1
0.0 to 500.0 Hz 60 Hz
SP13 13th preset speed 1 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 70 Hz
SP14 14th
preset speed 1
0.0 to 500.0 Hz 80 Hz
SP15 15th
preset speed 1
0.0 to 500.0 Hz 90 Hz
SP16 16th preset speed 1 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 100 Hz
1
Can also be accessed in the Settings menu, SEt-. See page 23.
FUn-
These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04
Application Functions Menu FUn- 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved58
Sub-menu Parameter Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting
JOG- Jog operation
JOG
Jog operation See below.
If tCC = 2C: nO
If tCC = 3C: LI4
If tCC = LOC: nO
Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function.
nO: Not assigned
LI1: Logic input LI1
LI2: Logic input LI2
LI3: Logic input LI3
LI4: Logic input LI4
LI5: Logic input LI5
LI6: Logic input LI6
Example: 2-wire control operation (tCC = 2C)
JGF Jog operation reference 1
0 to 10 Hz 10 Hz
1 Can also be accessed in the Settings menu, SEt-. See page 23.
FUn-
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
Ramp
forced to 0.1 s
Reference
JGF reference
JGF reference
LI (JOG)
Forward
Reverse
Ramp
DEC/DE2
Motor
frequency
≥ 0.5 s
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus
06/2004 Application Functions Menu FUn-
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 59
+/- Speed This function can only be accessed if:
1. Parameter LAC is set to L2 or L3 (see page 44).
2. Incompatible functions are not active (see page 19).
3. Parameter Fr1 or Fr2 is set to UPdt or UPdH.
The following sections describe two types of +/- speed operation: use of
single action buttons and use of double action buttons. A pendant station is
an example application of both.
Single Action Buttons Single action buttons require two logic inputs and two directions of rotation.
The input assigned to the + speed command increases the speed, the input
assigned to the - speed command decreases the speed.
Example of wiring:
LI1: forward
LIx: reverse
LIy: + speed (USP)
LIz: - speed (DSP)
The maximum speed is set by HSP (see page 24).
NOTE: If the reference is switched via rFC (see page 45) from any
reference channel to another with +/- speed, the value of reference rFr (after
ramp) is copied at the same time. This prevents the speed from being
incorrectly reset to zero when switching takes place.
- speed speed maintained + speed
Forward direction a and d a a and b
Reverse direction c and d c c and b
LI1
a c b d
LIx LIy LIZ
ATV31 Control Terminals
+24
a a a a a a a a
b b
c c
b
d
Motor frequency
LSP
Forward
0
Reverse
0
0
LSP
Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04
Application Functions Menu FUn- 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved60
Double Action Buttons Only one logic input, assigned to + speed, is required for double action
buttons. Double action buttons typically have two detents. Press the button
to the first detent to maintain speed; press it to the second detent to
increase speed. Each action closes a contact. Refer to the following table.
Example of wiring:
LI1: forward
LIx: reverse
LIy: + speed (USP)
Use of double action buttons is incompatible with 3-wire control.
The maximum speed is set by HSP (see page 24).
NOTE: If the reference is switched via rFC (see page 45) from any
reference channel to another with +/- speed, the value of reference rFr (after
ramp) is copied at the same time. This prevents the speed from being
incorrectly reset to zero when switching takes place.
Released
(- speed)
Press to 1st
detent
(speed maintained)
Press to 2nd
detent
(+ speed)
Forward direction – a a and b
Reverse direction – c c and d
LI1
a c
b d
LIx LIy
ATV31 Control Terminals
+ 24
a a a a a a a
b b
c c
d
Motor frequency
LSP
Forward
0
2nd press
1st
press
Reverse
0
2nd
press
1st
press
0
LSP
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus
06/2004 Application Functions Menu FUn-
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 61
Sub-menu Parameter Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting
UPd-
+/- Speed (motorized potentiometer)
This function can only be accessed if LAC = L2 or L3 and UPdH or UPdt is active (see page 44).
USP
+ Speed
Can only be accessed if UPdt is active.
See below. nO
Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function.
nO: Not assigned
LI1: Logic input LI1
LI2: Logic input LI2
LI3: Logic input LI3
LI4: Logic input LI4
LI5: Logic input LI5
LI6: Logic input LI6
dSP
- Speed
Can only be accessed if UPdt is active.
See below. nO
Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function.
nO: Not assigned
LI1: Logic input LI1
LI2: Logic input LI2
LI3: Logic input LI3
LI4: Logic input LI4
LI5: Logic input LI5
LI6: Logic input LI6
Str
Save reference See below. nO
Associated with the +/- speed function, this parameter can be used to save the reference:
When the run commands are removed, the reference is saved to RAM.
When the mains supply or the run commands are removed, the reference is saved to EEPROM.
On the next start-up, the speed reference is the last reference saved.
nO: No save
rAN: Save to RAM
EEP: Save to EEPROM
FUn-
These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04
Application Functions Menu FUn- 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved62
PI Regulator PI regulator provides regulation of a process using feedback from a sensor
that sends a signal to the drive controller. This function is often used for
pump and fan applications. The PI regulator function is activated by
assigning an analog input to PI regulator feedback (PIF).
The PI regulator feedback parameter (PIF, see page 66) must be assigned
to one of the analog inputs (AI1, AI2, or AI3).
The PI reference can be assigned to the following parameters, in order of
priority:
• Preset references via logic inputs (rP2, rP3, and rP4, see page 66)
• Internal reference (rPI, see page 67)
• Reference Fr1 (see page 44)
Refer to the following table for combining logic inputs for preset PI
references.
The following parameters can also be accessed in the Settings menu (SEt-,
beginning on page 23):
• Internal reference (rPI)
• Preset references (rP2, rP3, rP4)
• Regulator proportional gain (rPG)
• Regulator integral gain (rIG)
• PI feedback multiplication coefficient (FbS):
The FbS parameter can be used to scale the reference to the variation
range of the PI feedback (sensor range).
For example, Pressure control:
PI reference (process) = 0 to 5 bar = 0 to 100%
Range of pressure sensor = 0 to 10 bar
FbS = Maximum sensor scale / Maximum process
FbS = 10 / 5 = 2
rFC
HSP
FrH rFr
LSP
(man)
(auto)
nO
AI1
AI2
AI3
Pr2
Pr4
(rP1)
nO
+
-
rP2
rP3
rP4
ACC DEC
AC2 DE2
rIG
rPG
PIF
PIF
0
tLS
rSL
FbS
x FbS
x(-1)
x1
nO
YESnO
YES
rPI
PIC
PII
nO
AI1
AI2
AI3
LI
xxx
A
B
C
A
Internal
reference
Reference A
Pages 39 and
41
PI
feedback
Reference B
Pages 39 and 41
Preset PI
references
Error
inversion
Restart error
threshold
(wake-up)
Gains
Ramps
Legend:
The black square represents
the factory setting of
parameter xxx.
LI (Pr4) LI (Pr2) Pr2 = nO Reference
rPI or Fr1
0 0 rPI or Fr1
0 1 rP2
1 0 rP3
1 1 rP4
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus
06/2004 Application Functions Menu FUn-
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 63
• rSL parameter:
Can be used to set the PI error threshold above which the PI regulator is
reactivated (wake-up) after a stop due to the maximum time of operation
at low speed being exceeded (tLS).
• Reversal of the direction of correction (PIC):
If PIC = nO, the speed of the motor increases when the error is positive.
An example application is pressure control with a compressor.
If PIC = YES, the speed of the motor decreases when the error is
positive. An example application is temperature control with a cooling
fan.
Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04
Application Functions Menu FUn- 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved64
Manual–Automatic Operation with
PI Regulator
This function combines PI regulator and switching of reference rFC
(page 45). The speed reference is given by Fr2 or by the PI function,
depending on the state of the logic input.
Setting up the PI Regulator 1. Configure the drive controller for PI regulator. See the diagram on
page 62.
2. Perform a test with the factory configuration. In most cases, the factory
settings are sufficient. To optimize the drive controller, gradually adjust
rPG or rIG independently and observe the effect on PI feedback in
relation to the reference.
3. If the factory settings are unstable or the reference is incorrect, perform
a test with a speed reference in manual mode (without PI regulator) and
with the drive controller on load for the speed range of the system:
— In steady state, the speed must remain stable at the reference, and
the PI feedback signal must be stable.
— In transient state, the speed must follow the ramp then stabilize
quickly, and the PI feedback must follow the speed.
If this is not the case, check the drive controller settings and the sensor
signal and cabling.
4. Enable PI regulator.
5. Set brA to nO (no auto-adaptation of the ramp).
6. Set the speed ramps (ACC, dEC) to the minimum permitted by the
application without triggering an ObF fault.
7. Set the integral gain (rIG) to the minimum value.
8. Observe the PI feedback and the reference.
9. Perform several RUN/STOP cycles, or vary the load or reference
rapidly.
10. Set the proportional gain (rPG) to obtain the ideal compromise between
response time and stability in transient phases (slight overshoot and 1 to
2 oscillations before stabilizing).
11. If the reference varies from the preset value in steady state, gradually
increase the integral gain (rIG) and reduce the proportional gain (rPG) in
the event of instability (pump applications) to find a compromise
between response time and static precision. Refer to the figure on
page 62.
12. Perform in-production tests throughout the reference range.
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus
06/2004 Application Functions Menu FUn-
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 65
The oscillation frequency depends on the application.
rPG high
Overshoot
Stabilization time
rPG low
Static error
Rise time
time
rIG high
rIG low
rPG and rIG correct
time
time
Reference
Reference
Reference
Proportional
gain
Integral
gain
Parameter Rise Time Overshoot
Stabilization
Time
Static Error
rPG
=
rIG
Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04
Application Functions Menu FUn- 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved66
Sub-menu Parameter Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting
PI- PI regulator
PIF
PI regulator feedback See below. nO
nO: Not assigned
AI1: Analog input AI1
AI2: Analog input AI2
AI3: Analog input AI3
rPG
PI regulator proportional gain 1
0.01 to 100 1
Contributes to dynamic performance during rapid changes in the PI feedback.
rIG
PI regulator integral gain 1
0.01 to 100 1
Contributes to static precision during slow changes in the PI feedback.
FbS
PI feedback multiplication coefficient 1
0.1 to 100 1
For process adaptation
PIC
Reversal of the PI regulator direction of correction 1
See below. nO
nO: normal
YES: reverse
Pr2
2 preset PI references See below. nO
Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function.
nO: Not assigned
L11: Logic input LI1
LI2: Logic input LI2
LI3: Logic input LI3
LI4: Logic input LI4
LI5: Logic input LI5
LI6: Logic input LI6
If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible:
Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Pr4
4 preset PI references See below. nO
Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function.
NOTE: Ensure that Pr2 has been assigned before assigning Pr4.
nO: Not assigned
LI1: Logic input LI1
LI2: Logic input LI2
LI3: Logic input LI3
LI4: Logic input LI4
LI5: Logic input LI5
LI6: Logic input LI6
If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible:
Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
rP2
2nd
preset PI reference 1
0 to 100% 30%
Only appears if Pr2 has been enabled by selecting an input.
rP3
3rd
preset PI reference 1
0 to 100% 60%
Only appears if Pr4 has been enabled by selecting an input.
rP4
4th
preset PI reference 1
0 to 100% 90%
Only appears if Pr4 has been enabled by selecting an input.
1
Can also be accessed in the Settings menu, SEt-. See page 23.
FUn-
These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus
06/2004 Application Functions Menu FUn-
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 67
Sub-menu Parameter Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting
PI-
(continued)
rSL
Restart after error threshold (wake-up threshold) 0 to 100% 0
If the PI and low speed operating time (tLS, see page 26) functions are configured for the same time, the PI
regulator may attempt to set a speed lower than LSP. This results in unsatisfactory operation which consists
of a cycle of starting, operating at low speed, then stopping.
Parameter rSL (restart error threshold) can be used to set a minimum PI error threshold for restarting after a
stop at prolonged LSP.
The function is inactive if tLS = 0.
PII
Internal PI regulator reference nO
nO: The PI regulator reference is Fr1, except for UPdH and UPdt (+/- speed cannot be used as the PI
regulator reference).
YES: The PI regulator reference is parameter rPI.
rPI Internal PI regulator reference 1 0 to 100% 0
1
Can also be accessed in the Settings menu, SEt-. See page 23.
FUn-
These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04
Application Functions Menu FUn- 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved68
Brake Control Brake control enables the drive controller to manage an electromagnetic
brake. This function can only be accessed if LAC = L2 or L3 (page 40) and
no incompatible functions are programmed (see page 19). It can be
assigned to relay R2 or to logic output AOC.
To prevent jolts, synchronize the brake release with torque build-up during
startup, and synchronize the brake engage with zero speed on stopping.
Refer to the following figure for braking sequence.
The following parameters can be accessed in the FUn- menu (see page 70):
• Brake release frequency (brL)
• Brake release current (Ibr)
• Brake release time (brt)
• Brake engage frequency (bEn)
• Brake engage time (bEt)
• Brake release pulse (bIP)
t
t
t
t
0
0
1
Ibr
brt
0
bEn
0
1
t
0
bEt
brL
1
0
Speed
reference
Speed
reference
Motor frequency
Relay R2
or
logic output
AOC
LI forward
or reverse
Motor current
Motor speed
Engaged
Released
Brake status
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus
06/2004 Application Functions Menu FUn-
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 69
The following are the recommended settings for brake control:
1. Brake release frequency (brL):
— Horizontal movement: Set to 0.
— Vertical movement: Set to the nominal slip of the motor in Hz.
2. Brake release current (Ibr):
— Horizontal movement: Set to 0.
— Vertical movement: Set to the nominal current of the motor at first,
then adjust the release current to prevent jolting on start-up. Ensure
that the maximum load is held when the brake is released.
3. Brake release time (brt):
— Adjust according to the type of brake. Brake release time is the time
required for the mechanical brake to release.
4. Brake engage frequency (bEn)
— Set to twice the nominal slip of the motor, then adjust according to
the result.
NOTE: The maximum value of bEn is LSP. Ensure that LSP is set to a
sufficient value.
5. Brake engage time (bEt):
— Adjust according to the type of brake. This is the time required for the
mechanical brake to engage.
6. Brake release pulse (bIP):
— Horizontal movement: Set to nO.
— Vertical movement: Set to YES and ensure that the motor torque
direction for forward control corresponds to the upward direction of
the load. If necessary, reverse two motor phases. This parameter
generates motor torque in an upward direction, regardless of the
direction of operation, to maintain the load while the brake is
releasing.
Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04
Application Functions Menu FUn- 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved70
Sub-menu Parameter Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting
bLC-
Brake control
This function can only be accessed if LAC = L2 or L3 (page 40).
bLC
Brake control configuration See below. nO
nO: Not assigned
r2: Relay R2
dO: Logic output AOC
If bLC is assigned, parameter FLr (page 78) and brA (page 50) are forced to nO, and parameter OPL (page
78) is forced to YES.
brL Brake release frequency 0.0 to 10.0 Hz
Varies with drive
controller rating
Ibr Motor current threshold for brake release 0 to 1.36 In 1 Varies with drive
controller rating
brt Brake release time 0 to 5 s 0.5 s
LSP
Low speed 0 to HSP (page 24) 0 Hz
Motor frequency at minimum reference. This parameter can also be modified in the SEt- menu (page 24).
bEn
Brake engage frequency threshold nO, 0 to LSP Hz nO
nO: Not set
If bLC is assigned and bEn = nO, the drive controller will trip on bLF fault at start-up.
bEt Brake engage time 0 to 5 s 0.5s
bIP
Brake release pulse See below. nO
nO: While the brake is releasing, the motor torque direction corresponds to the commanded direction of
rotation.
YES: While the brake is releasing, the motor torque direction is always forward, regardless of the
commanded direction of rotation.
Ensure that the motor torque direction for Forward control corresponds to the upward direction of the load. If
necessary, reverse two motor phases.
1
In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the ATV31 Installation Manual and on the drive controller nameplate.
FUn-
These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus
06/2004 Application Functions Menu FUn-
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 71
Sub-menu Parameter Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting
LC2-
Switching for second current limit
This function can only be accessed if LAC = L2 or L3 (page 40).
LC2
Switching for second current limit See below. nO
Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function.
nO: Not assigned
LI1: Logic input LI1
LI2: Logic input LI2
LI3: Logic input LI3
LI4: Logic input LI4
LI5: Logic input LI5
LI6: Logic input LI6
If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible:
Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
CL1 is enabled when the logic input or control word bit is in state 0 (SEt- menu page 26).
CL2 is enabled when the logic input or control word bit is in state 1.
CL2 2nd
current limit 1
0.25 to 1.5 In 2
1.5 In 2
1
Can also be accessed in the Settings menu, SEt-. See page 23.
2
In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the ATV31 Installation Manual and on the drive controller nameplate.
FUn-
These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04
Application Functions Menu FUn- 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved72
Sub-menu Parameter Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting
CHP-
Motor switching
This function can only be accessed if LAC = L2 or L3 (page 40).
CHP
Switching, motor 2 See below. nO
nO: Not assigned
LI1: Logic input LI1
LI2: Logic input LI2
LI3: Logic input LI3
LI4: Logic input LI4
LI5: Logic input LI5
LI6: Logic input LI6
If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible:
Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
LI or bit = 0: Motor 1
LI or bit = 1: Motor 2
• The motor switching function disables motor thermal protection. An external means of motor thermal
protection must be provided. See the caution message on page 12.
• If you use this function, do not use the tUn auto-tuning function (page 29) on motor 2 and do not
configure tUn to rUn or POn.
• Changes to parameters do not take effect until the drive controller is stopped.
UnS2
Nominal motor voltage (motor 2) given on the nameplate
Varies with drive
controller rating
Varies with drive
controller rating
ATV31•••M2: 100 to 240 V
ATV31•••M3X: 100 to 240 V
ATV31•••N4: 100 to 500 V
ATV31•••S6X:100 to 600 V
FrS2
Nominal motor frequency (motor 2) given on the nameplate 10 to 500 Hz 50 Hz
The ratio must not exceed the following values
ATV31•••M2: 7 max.
ATV31•••M3X: 7 max
ATV31•••N4: 14 max.
ATV31•••S6X: 17 max.
Changing the setting of bFr to 60 Hz also changes the setting of FrS2 to 60 Hz.
nCr2 Nominal motor current (motor 2) given on the nameplate 0.25 to 1.5 In 1 Varies with drive
controller rating
nSP2
Nominal motor speed (motor 2) given on the nameplate 0 to 32760 RPM
Varies with drive
controller rating
0 to 9999 rpm, then 10.00 to 32.76 krpm
If the nameplate indicates synchronous speed and slip (in Hz or as a percentage) instead of nominal speed,
calculate nominal speed as follows:
Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x
or
Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x (50 Hz motors)
or
Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x (60 Hz motors)
1
In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the ATV31 Installation Manual and on the drive controller nameplate.
FUn-
UnS (in V)
FrS (in Hz)
100 - slip as a%
100
50 - slip in Hz
50
60 - slip in Hz
60
These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus
06/2004 Application Functions Menu FUn-
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 73
Sub-menu Parameter Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting
CHP-
(continued)
COS2 Motor power factor (motor 2) given on the nameplate 0.5 to 1
Varies with drive
controller rating
UFt2
Selection of the type of voltage/frequency ratio (motor 2) See below. n
L: Constant torque (for motors connected in parallel or special motors)
P: Variable torque (pump and fan applications)
n: Sensorless flux vector control (for constant torque applications)
nLd: Energy savings (for variable torque applications not requiring high dynamics. This behaves in a
similar way to the P ratio at no load and the n ratio at load).
UFr2
IR compensation/Voltage boost (motor 2) 1 0 to 100% 20
For UFt2 = n or nLd: IR compensation. For UFt2 = L or P: Voltage boost.
Used to optimize the torque at low speed. Increase UFr2 if the torque is insufficient. To avoid operating
instability, ensure that the value of UFr2 is not too high for a warm motor. Modifying UFt2 causes UFr2 to
return to the factory setting (20%).
FLG2
Frequency loop gain (motor 2) 1 1 to 100% 20
FLG2 can only be accessed if UFt2 = n or nLd (see page 73).This parameter adjusts the speed ramp based
on the inertia of the driven load.
If the value is too low, the response time is longer.
If the value is too high, overspeed or operating instability can result.
StA2
Frequency loop stability (motor 2) 1
1 to 100% 20
StA2 can only be accessed if UFt2 = n or nLd (see page 73).
This parameter adapts the return to steady state after a speed transient (acceleration or deceleration)
according to the dynamics of the driven machine.
Gradually increase the stability to avoid any overspeed.
If the value is too low, overspeed or operating instability can result.
If the value is too high, the response time is longer.
SLP2
Slip compensation (motor 2) 1
0 to 150% 100
SLP2 can only be accessed if UFt2 = n or nLd (see page 73).
This parameter adjusts the slip compensation value fixed by nominal motor speed.
If the slip setting < actual slip, the motor is not rotating at the correct speed in steady state.
If the slip setting > actual slip, the motor is overcompensated and the speed is unstable.
1
Can also be accessed in the Settings menu, SEt-. See page 23.
FUn-
L
UnS
FrS
n
P
Voltage
Frequency
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
-10
10
20
30
40
0
50
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
-10
10
20
30
40
0
50
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
-10
10
20
30
40
0
50
t
Hz
t
Hz
t
Hz
FLG2 low FLG2 correct FLG2 high
In this case,
increase FLG2
In this case,
reduce FLG2
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 t
-10
10
20
30
40
0
50
Hz
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 t
-10
10
20
30
40
0
50
Hz
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 t
-10
10
20
30
40
0
50
Hz
StA2 low StA2 correct StA2 high
In this case,
increase StA2
In this case,
reduce StA2
These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04
Application Functions Menu FUn- 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved74
Management of Limit Switches This function can be used to manage the operation of one or two limit
switches, in 1 or 2 directions of operation. It can only be accessed if
LAC = L2 or L3 (see page 40). To use the function:
• Assign one or two logic inputs to forward limit and reverse limit.
• Select the type of stop (on ramp, fast, or freewheel stop). After a stop,
the motor is permitted to restart in the opposite direction only.
• The stop is performed when the input is in state 0. The direction of
operation is authorized in state 1.
Sub-menu Parameter Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting
LSt-
Management of limit switches
LSt- can only be accessed if LAC = L2 or L3 (page 40).
LAF
Limit, forward direction See below. nO
nO: Not assigned
LI1: Logic input LI1
LI2: Logic input LI2
LI3: Logic input LI3
LI4: Logic input LI4
LI5: Logic input LI5
LI6: Logic input LI6
LAr
Limit, reverse direction See below. nO
nO: Not assigned
LI1: Logic input LI1
LI2: Logic input LI2
LI3: Logic input LI3
LI4: Logic input LI4
LI5: Logic input LI5
LI6: Logic input LI6
LAS
Type of limit switch stop See below. nSt
r P: On ramp
FSt: Fast stop
nSt: Freewheel stop
FUn-
These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus
06/2004 Application Functions Menu FUn-
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 75
Sub-menu Parameter Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting
SCS
Saving the configuration 1
See below. nO
nO: Function inactive
StrI: Saves the current configuration (but not the result of auto-tuning) to EEPROM. SCS automatically
switches to nO as soon as the save is performed. Use this function to keep another configuration in reserve, in
addition to the current configuration.
The drive controller is factory set with the current configuration and the backup configuration both initialized to
the factory configuration.
If the remote keypad display is connected to the drive controller, up to four additional settings are available:
FIL1, FIL2, FIL3, and FIL4. Use these selections to save up to four configurations in the remote
keypad display’s EEPROM memory.
SCS automatically switches to nO as soon as the save is performed.
FCS
Return to factory setting/restore configuration 1
See below. nO
nO: Function inactive
rECI: Replaces the current configuration with the backup configuration previously saved by SCS (SCS set
to Strl). rECI is visible only if the backup configuration has been saved. FCS automatically changes to nO as
soon as this action is performed.
InI: Replaces the current configuration with the factory settings. FCS automatically switches to nO as soon
as this action is performed.
If the remote keypad display is connected to the drive controller, up to four additional selections are available
corresponding to backup files loaded in the remote keypad display's EEPROM memory: FIL1, FIL2,
FIL3, and FIL4. These selections replace the current configuration with the corresponding backup
configuration in the remote keypad display. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action is
performed.
Note: If nAd briefly appears on the display once the parameter has switched to nO, the configuration transfer
is not possible and has not been performed (because the controller ratings are different, for example). If ntr
briefly appears on the display once the parameter has switched to nO, a configuration transfer error has
occurred and the factory settings must be restored using InI. In both cases, check the configuration to be
transferred before trying again.
NOTE: For rECI, InI, and FIL1 to FIL4 to take effect, you must press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s.
1
SCS and FCS can be accessed via several configuration menus but they concern all menus and parameters as a whole.
FUn-
Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04
Fault Menu FLt- 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved76
FAULT MENU FLT-
Fault Menu parameters can only be modified when the drive is stopped and
no run command is present.
On the optional remote keypad display, this menu can be accessed with the
switch in the position.
ESC
ENT
Atr
ENT ESC
ENTESC
rPr
ESC
ESC
FLt-
Automatic restart
Operating time reset to zero
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus
06/2004 Fault Menu FLt-
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 77
Code Description Factory Setting
Atr
Automatic restart nO
nO: Function inactive
YES: Automatic restart after locking on a fault, if the cause of the fault is not longer present and the other operating conditions
permit the restart. The restart is performed by a series of automatic attempts separated by increasingly longer waiting periods:
1 s, 5 s, 10 s, then once per minute for the period defined by tAr.
If the restart has not taken place once the maximum duration of restart time, tAr, has elapsed, the procedure is aborted and the
drive controller remains locked until power is cycled.
The following faults permit automatic restart:
External fault (EPF)
Loss of 4-20 mA reference (LFF)
CANopen fault (COF)
System overvoltage (OSF)
Loss of a line phase (PHF)
Loss of a motor phase (OPF)
DC bus overvoltage (ObF)
Motor overload (OLF)
Serial link (SLF)
Drive overheating (OHF)
This function requires 2-wire control (tCC = 2C) with tCt = LEL or PFO (page 31).
Ensure that an automatic restart will not endanger personnel or equipment in any way. Refer to the Warning message below.
tAr
Maximum duration of restart process 5 minutes
5: 5 minutes
10: 10 minutes
30: 30 minutes
1h: 1 hour
2h: 2 hours
3h: 3 hours
Ct: Unlimited
This parameter appears if Atr = YES. It can be used to limit the number of consecutive restarts on a recurrent fault.
rSF
Fault reset no
nO: Not assigned
LI1: Logic input LI1
LI2: Logic input LI2
LI3: Logic input LI3
LI4: Logic input LI4
LI5: Logic input LI5
LI6: Logic input LI6
These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
FLt-
WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
• Automatic Restart can only be used for machines or installations that
present no danger in the event of automatic restarting, either for
personnel or equipment.
• If Automatic Restart is active, R1 will only indicate a fault after the restart
sequence has timed out.
• Equipment operation must conform to national and local safety
regulations.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious
injury, or equipment damage.
Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04
Fault Menu FLt- 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved78
Code Description Factory Setting
FLr
Catch on the fly (automatically catch a spinning load on ramp) nO
Enables a smooth restart of a spinning load if the run command is maintained after the following events:
• Loss of line supply or disconnection
• Fault reset or automatic restart. See the warning on page 77.
• Freewheel stop
The speed given by the drive controller resumes from the estimated speed of the motor at the time of the restart, then follows the
ramp to the reference speed.
This function requires 2-wire control (tCC = 2C) with tCt = LEL or PFO.
nO: Function inactive
YES: Function active
When the function is enabled, it activates at each run command, resulting in a slight delay (1 second maximum) before start.
FLr is forced to nO if brake control (bLC) is assigned (page 70).
EtF
External fault nO
nO: Not assigned
LI1: Logic input LI1
LI2: Logic input LI2
LI3: Logic input LI3
LI4: Logic input LI4
LI5: Logic input LI5
LI6: Logic input LI6
If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible:
Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word
EPL
Stop mode in the event of an external fault (EtF) YES
nO: Fault ignored
YES: Fault with a freewheel stop
rNP: Fault with a stop on the ramp
FSt: Fault with a fast stop
OPL
Configuration of motor phase loss fault YES
nO: Function inactive
YES: Triggering of OPF fault
OAC: No fault is triggered, but output voltage is monitored to avoid an overcurrent when the link with the motor is re-established
and a catch on the fly occurs, even if FLr = nO. To be used with a downstream contactor.
OPL is forced to YES if brake control (bLC) is assigned (page 70).
IPL
Configuration of line phase loss fault YES
This parameter is only accessible on three-phase drives.
nO: Fault ignored
YES: Fault with fast stop
OHL
Stop mode in the event of a drive overheating fault (OHF) YES
nO: Fault ignored
YES: Fault with a freewheel stop
rNP: Fault with a stop on the ramp
FSt: Fault with a fast stop
OLL
Stop mode in the event of a motor overload fault (OLF) YES
nO: Fault ignored
YES: Fault with a freewheel stop
rNP: Fault with a stop on the ramp
FSt: Fault with a fast stop
FLt-
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus
06/2004 Fault Menu FLt-
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 79
Code Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting
SLL
Stop mode in the event of a Modbus serial link fault (SLF) See below. YES
nO: Fault ignored
YES: Fault with a freewheel stop
rNP: Fault with a stop on the ramp
FSt: Fault with a fast stop
COL
Stop mode in the event of a CANopen serial link fault (COF) See below. YES
nO: Fault ignored
YES: Fault with a freewheel stop
rNP: Fault with a stop on the ramp
FSt: Fault with a fast stop
tnL
Configuration of auto-tuning fault (tnF) See below. YES
nO: Fault ignored (the drive controller reverts to the factory settings)
YES: Fault with drive controller locked
LFL
Stop mode in the event of a loss of 4 - 20 mA signal fault (LFF) See below. nO
nO: Fault ignored (only value possible if CrL3 ≤3 mA, see page 32)
YES: Fault with a freewheel stop
LFF: The drive controller switches to the fallback speed (see LFF parameter below)
rLS: The drive controller maintains the speed at which it was running when the fault occurred until the fault is no longer present.
rNP: Fault with a stop on the ramp
FSt: Fault with a fast stop
Before setting LFL to YES, rMP, or FSt, check the connection of input AI3. Otherwise, the drive controller may immediately switch
to an LFF fault.
LFF
Fallback speed 0 to 500 Hz 10 Hz
Fallback speed setting for stopping in the event of a fault
drn
Derated operation in the event of an undervoltage See below. nO
nO: Function inactive
YES: The line voltage monitoring threshold is:
ATV31•••M2: 130 V
ATV31•••M3X: 130 V
ATV31•••N4: 270 V
ATV31•••S6X: 340 V
In this case, a line choke must be used and the performance of the drive controller cannot be guaranteed.
In order to assign this function, you must press and hold down the ENT key for 2 seconds.
StP
Controlled stop on loss of mains power See below. nO
nO: Lock the drive controller and stop the motor on a freewheel
NNS: Use the inertia to maintain the drive controller power supply as long as possible
rNP: Stop on the active ramp (dEC or dE2)
FSt: Fast stop. The stopping time depends on the inertia and the braking ability of the drive controller.
InH
Fault inhibit See below. nO
nO: Not assigned
LI1: Logic input LI1
LI2: Logic input LI2
LI3: Logic input LI3
LI4: Logic input LI4
LI5: Logic input LI5
LI6: Logic input LI6
Fault monitoring is active when the input is in state 0. It is inactive when the input is in state 1.
All active faults are reset when the input state changes from 1 to 0.
NOTE: To assign this function, you must press and hold down the ENT key for 2 seconds.
rPr
Operating time reset to zero See below. nO
nO: No
rtH: Operating time reset to zero
The rPr parameter is automatically set to nO as soon as the reset to zero is performed.
FLt-
CAUTION
LOSS OF FAULT PROTECTION
Inhibiting faults may damage the drive controller beyond repair by preventing shutdown upon
occurrence of a fault.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in equipment damage.
Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04
Communication Menu COM- 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved80
COMMUNICATION MENU COM-
The Communication menu parameters can only be modified when the drive
controller is stopped and no run command is present. Modifications to
parameters Add, tbr, tFO, AdCO, and bdCO take effect only after a restart.
On the optional remote keypad display, this menu can be accessed with the
switch in the position.
ESC
ENT
Add
ENT ESC
ENTESC
FLOC
ESC
ESC
CON-
Code Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting
Add Modbus: Drive address 1 to 247 1
tbr
Modbus: Transmission speed 19200 bps
4.8: 4800 bps
9.6: 9600 bps
19.2: 19200 bps
NOTE: The remote keypad display can only be used with the transmission speed set to 19200 bps.
tFO
Modbus communication format See below. 8E1
8O1: 8 data bits, odd parity, 1 stop bit
8E1: 8 data bits, even parity, 1 stop bit
8n1: 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit
8n2: 8 data bits, no parity, 2 stop bits
NOTE: The remote keypad display can only be used with the communication format set to 8 data bits, even parity, 1 stop bit.
ttO Modbus: Time-out 0.1 to 10 s 10 s
AdCO CANopen: Drive address 0 to 127 0
bdCO
CANopen: Transmission speed See below. 125
10.0: 10 kbps
20.0: 20 kbps
50.0: 50 kbps
125.0: 125 kbps
250.0: 250 kbps
500.0: 500 kbps
1000: 1000 kbps
ErCO
CANopen: Error registry (read-only) See below.
0: No error
1: Bus off error
2: Life time error
3: CAN overrun
4: Heartbeat error
FLO
Forced local mode See below. nO
nO: Not assigned
LI1: Logic input LI1
LI2: Logic input LI2
LI3: Logic input LI3
LI4: Logic input LI4
LI5: Logic input LI5
LI6: Logic input LI6
In forced local mode, the terminal block and drive keypad display regain control of the drive controller.
CON-
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus
06/2004 Communication Menu COM-
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 81
Code Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting
FLOC
Selection of the reference and control channel in forced local mode
Can only be accessed if LAC = 3
See below.
AI1
AIP for ATV31••••••A
In forced local mode, only the speed reference is taken into account. PI functions, summing inputs, etc. are not active.
Refer to the diagrams on pages 40 to 43.
AI1: Analog input AI1, logic inputs LI
AI2: Analog input AI2, logic inputs LI
AI3: Analog input AI3, logic inputs LI
AIP: Potentiometer (ATV31••••••A controllers only), RUN/STOP buttons
LCC: Remote keypad display: LFr reference (page 24), RUN/STOP/FWD/REV buttons
CON-
These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04
Display Menu SUP- 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved82
DISPLAY MENU SUP-
The display menu parameters can be accessed with the drive controller
running or stopped. This menu can be accessed with the access locking
switch on the remote keypad display in any position.
Some functions have numerous parameters. To simplify programming and
to keep parameter lists short, these functions have been grouped in sub-
menus. Like menus, sub-menus are identified by a dash after their code.
For example, LIA- is a submenu.
When the drive controller is running, the value of one of the display
parameters is shown. To change the parameter displayed, scroll to the
desired display parameter and press the ENT key. To retain your selection
as the new default, press and hold the ENT key again for 2 seconds. The
value of this parameter will be displayed during operation, even after power
to the drive controller has been cycled. If the new choice is not confirmed by
pressing the ENT key a second time, the drive controller will return to the
previous parameter after power is cycled.
ENT
ESC
LFr
ENT ENT
ESCESC
CPU
ESC
ENT
ESC
ENT
ESC
LIA-
ESC
ESC
SUP-
Sub-menu
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus
06/2004 Display Menu SUP-
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 83
Code Description Adjustment Range
LFr
Frequency reference for control via the drive controller
keypad or the remote keypad display
0 to 500 Hz
rPI Internal PI reference 0 to 100%
FrH Frequency reference before ramp (absolute value) 0 to 500 Hz
rFr Output frequency applied to the motor - 500 Hz to + 500 Hz
SPd1
or
SPd2
or
SPd3
Output value in customer units
SPd1, SPd2, or SPd3 depending on the SdS parameter, see page 27. Factory setting is SPd3.
LCr Motor current
Opr
Motor power
100% = Nominal motor power, calculated using the parameters entered in the drC- menu.
ULn Line voltage (Vac) calculated from the measured voltage on the DC bus
tHr
Motor thermal state
100% = Nominal thermal state
118% = OLF threshold (motor overload)
tHd
Drive thermal state
100% = Nominal thermal state
118% = OHF threshold (drive controller overload)
LFt
Last fault
bLF: Brake control fault
CFF: Configuration (parameters) incorrect
CFI: Configuration (parameters) invalid
COF: Communication fault line 2 (CANopen)
CrF: Capacitor pre-charge fault
EEF: EEPROM memory fault
EPF: External fault
InF: Internal fault
LFF: 4 - 20 mA fault on AI3
nOF: No fault saved
ObF: DC bus overvoltage fault
OCF: Overcurrent fault
OHF: Drive overheating fault
OLF: Motor overload fault
OPF: Motor phase loss fault
OSF: Line supply overvoltage fault
PHF: Line supply phase loss fault
SCF: Motor short-circuit fault (phase, earth)
SLF: Modbus communication fault
SOF: Motor overspeed fault
tnF: Auto-tuning fault
USF: Line supply undervoltage fault
Otr
Motor torque
100% = Nominal motor torque, calculated using the parameters entered in the drC- menu.
rtH
Operating time 0 to 65530 hours
Total time the motor has been powered up:
0 to 9999 (hours), then 10.00 to 65.53 (khours).
Can be reset to zero by the rPr parameter in the FLt- menu (see page 79).
SUP-
These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04
Display Menu SUP- 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved84
Code Description
COd
Terminal locking code
Allows the drive configuration to be protected with an access locking code.
NOTE: Before entering a code, be sure to record it.
0FF: No access locking code
• To lock the access, use the key to enter a code (2 to 9999) and press ENT. “ON” appears on the
screen to indicate that the parameters have been locked.
On: A code (2 to 9999) is locking the access to the drive controller
• To unlock the access, use the key to enter the access code (2 to 9999) and press ENT. The code
remains on the display and the access is unlocked until the next time the power is removed from the
controller. Parameter access will be locked again the next time power is reapplied.
• If an incorrect code is entered, the display changes to “ON” and the parameters remain locked.
XXXX: Parameter access is unlocked (the code remains on the screen).
• To reactivate locking with the same code when the parameters have been unlocked, return to ON.
using the button then press ENT. “ON” appears on the screen to indicate that the parameters have
been locked.
• To lock the access with a new code when the parameters have been unlocked, enter a new code
(increment the display using or ) and press ENT. “ON” appears on the screen to indicate that the
parameters have been locked.
• To clear locking when the parameters have been unlocked, return to OFF using the button and
press ENT. “OFF” remains on the screen. The parameters are unlocked and will remain unlocked.
When the access is locked using a code, only the display parameters are accessible, with only a temporary
choice of the parameter displayed.
tUS
Auto-tuning status. See page 29.
tAb: The default stator resistance value is used to control the motor.
PEnd: Auto-tuning has been requested, but not yet performed.
PrOG: Auto-tuning in progress.
FAIL: Auto-tuning has failed.
dOnE: Auto-tuning is complete. The stator resistance measured by the auto-tuning function is used to
control the motor.
Strd: Auto-tuning is complete. The cold stator resistance (rSC other than nO) is used to control the motor.
UdP
Indicates the ATV31 firmware version.
For example, 1102 = V1.1 IE02.
LIA- Logic input functions
LI1A
LI2A
LI3A
LI4A
LI5A
LI6A
Can be used to display the functions assigned to each input. If no functions are assigned, nO is displayed.
Use and to scroll through the functions. If a number of functions have been assigned to the same
input, ensure that they are compatible.
LIS
Can be used to display the state of the logic inputs (using the segments of the display:
high = 1, low = 0)
Example above: LI1 and LI6 are at 1, LI2–LI5 are at 0.
AIA- Analog input functions
AI1A
AI2A
AI3A
Can be used to display the functions assigned to each input. If no functions have been assigned, nO is
displayed. Use and to scroll through the functions. If a number of functions are assigned to the
same input, ensure that they are compatible.
SUP-
State 1
State 0
LI1 LI2 LI3 LI4 LI5 LI6
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 4: Maintenance and Troubleshooting
06/2004 Precautions
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 85
SECTION 4: MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
PRECAUTIONS Read the following safety statements before proceeding with any
maintenance or troubleshooting procedures.
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE Perform the following steps at regular intervals:
• Check the condition and tightness of the connections.
• Make sure that the ventilation is effective and that the temperature
around the drive controller remains at an acceptable level.
• Remove dust and debris from the drive controller, if necessary.
NORMAL DISPLAY A normal display with no fault present and no run command shows:
• The value of one of the display parameters (see page 82).
• init: Initialization sequence
• rdY: Drive ready
• dcb: DC injection braking in progress
• nSt: Freewheel stop. See page 15.
• FSt: Fast stop
• tUn: Auto-tuning in progress
FAULT DISPLAY If a problem arises during setup or operation, ensure that all ambient
environment, mounting, and connection recommendations have been
followed.
The first fault detected is stored and displayed, flashing, on the screen. The
drive controller locks and the fault relay (RA-RC) contact opens, if it has
been configured for this function.
Drive Controller Does Not Start, No Fault
Displayed
If the drive controller will not start and there is no display indication, consider
the following:
1. Check the power supply to the drive controller.
2. The assignment of the fast stop or freewheel stop functions prevents the
drive controller from starting if the corresponding logic inputs are not
powered up. In this case, the drive controller displays nSt in freewheel
stop mode and FSt in fast mode. This is normal, since these functions
are active at zero speed so that the drive controller will stop safely if
there is a wire break.
3. Ensure that the run command inputs have been actuated in accordance
with the chosen control mode (tCC parameter in the I-O- menu. See
page 31).
DANGER
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE
• Disconnect all power before servicing the drive controller.
• Read and understand these procedure and the precaution on page 14
of this manual before servicing the ATV31 drive controllers.
• Installation, adjustment, and maintenance of these drive controllers
must be performed by qualified personnel.
Failure to follow this instruction will result in death or serious injury.
Section 4: Maintenance and Troubleshooting VVDED303042USR6/04
Fault Display 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved86
4. If an input is assigned to the limit switch function and this input is at state
0, the drive controller can only be started by sending a command for the
opposite direction (see page 74).
5. If the reference channel (page 39) or the control channel (page 40) is
assigned to Modbus or CANopen, the drive controller displays nSt on
power up and remains stopped until the communication bus sends a
command.
Clearing Faults The drive controller can be unlocked after a fault by the following methods:
• Removing power from the drive controller until the display clears.
• Automatically, if the automatic restart function is enabled (parameter Atr
is set to Yes, see page 77)
• By a logic input, if a logic input is assigned to the fault reset function
(parameter rSF assigned to LI•, see page 77)
Faults Which Cannot Be Automatically
Reset
Faults which cannot be automatically reset are listed in the table below. To
clear these faults:
1. Remove power from the drive controller.
2. Wait for the display to go off completely.
3. Determine the cause of the fault and correct it.
4. Reapply power.
bLF, CrF, OCF, SOF, and tnF can also be reset remotely via a logic input.
Refer to the rSF parameter on page 77.
Fault Probable Cause Remedy
bLF
Brake sequence
Brake release current not reached
• Check the drive controller and
motor connections.
• Check the motor windings.
• Check the Ibr setting in the FUn-
menu. Refer to page 70.
CrF
Precharge circuit
fault
Precharge circuit damaged
• Reset the drive controller.
• Replace the drive controller.
InF
Internal fault
• Internal fault
• Internal connection fault
• Remove sources of
electromagnetic interference.
• Replace the drive controller.
OCF
Overcurrent
• Incorrect parameter settings in
the SEt- and drC- menus
• Acceleration too rapid
• Drive controller and/or motor
undersized for load
• Mechanical blockage
• Check the SEt- and drC-
parameters.
• Ensure that the size of the motor
and drive controller is sufficient
for the load.
• Clear the mechanical blockage.
SCF
Motor short circuit
• Short circuit or grounding at the
drive controller output
• Significant ground leakage
current at the drive controller
output if several motors are
connected in parallel
• Check the cables connecting the
drive controller to the motor, and
check the motor insulation.
• Reduce the switching frequency.
• Connect output filters in series
with the motor.
SOF
Overspeed
• Instability
• Overhauling load
• Check the motor, gain, and
stability parameters.
• Add a braking resistor.
• Check the size of the motor,
drive controller, and load.
tnF
Auto-tuning fault
• Motor or motor power not
suitable for the drive controller
• Motor not connected to the drive
controller
• Use the L or the P ratio (see UFt
on page 29).
• Check the presence of the motor
during auto-tuning.
• If a downstream contactor is
being used, close it during auto-
tuning.
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 4: Maintenance and Troubleshooting
06/2004 Fault Display
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 87
Faults Which Can Be Automatically
Reset
After the cause of the fault has been removed, the faults in the table below
can be reset:
• With the automatic restart function. Refer to the Atr parameter in the FLt-
menu on page 77.
• Via a logic input. Refer to the rSF parameter in the FLt- menu on
page 77.
• By cycling power to the drive controller.
Fault Probable Cause Remedy
COF
Serial link failure
CANopen
Loss of communication between the
drive controller and communication
device or remote keypad.
• Check the communication bus.
• Refer to the product-specific
documentation.
EPF
External fault
User defined User defined
LFF
Loss of 4-20 mA
follower
Loss of the 4-20 mA reference on
input AI3
Check the connection on input AI3.
ObF
Overvoltage
during deceleration
• Braking too rapidly
• Overhauling load
• Increase the deceleration time.
• Install a braking resistor if
necessary.
• Activate the brA function if it is
compatible with the application.
Refer to page 50.
OHF
Drive overload
• Drive controller or ambient
temperature are too high.
• Continuous motor current load is
too high.
Check the motor load, the drive
controller ventilation, and the
environment. Wait for the drive
controller to cool before restarting.
OLF
Motor overload
• Thermal trip due to prolonged
motor overload
• Motor power rating too low for
the application
Check the ItH setting (motor thermal
protection, page 24), check the
motor load. Allow the motor to cool
before restarting.
OPF
Motor phase failure
• Loss of phase at drive controller
output
• Downstream contactor open
• Motor not connected
• Instability in the motor current
• Drive controller oversized for
motor
• Check the connections from the
drive controller to the motor.
• If a downstream contactor is
being used, set OPL to OAC.
Refer to page 78.
• Test the drive controller on a low
power motor or without a motor:
set OPL to nO. Refer to page 78.
• Check and optimize the UFr
(page 25), UnS (page 28), and
nCr (page 28) parameters and
perform auto-tuning (page 29).
OSF
Overvoltage during
steady state
operation or during
acceleration
• Line voltage too high
• Line supply transients
• Check the line voltage. Compare
with the drive controller
nameplate rating.
• Reset the drive controller.
PHF
Input phase failure
• Input phase loss, blown fuse
• Three-phase drive controller
used on a single phase line
supply
• Input phase imbalance
• Transient phase fault
NOTE: This protection only
operates with the drive controller
running under load.
• Check the connections and the
fuses.
• Disable the fault by setting IPL
to nO. Refer to page 78.
• Verify that the input power is
correct.
• Supply three-phase power if
needed.
SLF
Serial link failure
Modbus
Loss of connection between the
drive controller and the
communication device or the remote
keypad display.
• Check the communication
connection.
• Refer to the product-specific
documentation.
Section 4: Maintenance and Troubleshooting VVDED303042USR6/04
Configuration Settings Tables 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved88
Faults That Reset When the Fault Is
Cleared
CONFIGURATION SETTINGS TABLES Use the configuration settings tables beginning on page 89 to prepare and
record the configuration before programming the drive controller. It is
always possible to return to the factory settings by setting the FCS
parameter to Init in the drC-, I-O-, CtL-, or FUn- menus. See pages 30, 33,
47, or 75.
Fault Probable Cause Remedy
CFF
Configuration fault
The parameter configurations are
not suited to the application.
Restore the factory settings or load
the backup configuration, if it is
valid. See parameter FCS in the
drC- menu, page 33.
CFI
Configuration fault
via serial link
The parameter configurations
loaded in the drive controller via the
serial link are not suited to the
application.
• Check the configuration loaded
previously.
• Load a compatible configuration.
USF
Undervoltage
• Line supply too low
• Transient voltage dip
• Damaged precharge resistor
• Check the line voltage.
• Check the setting of the UNS
parameter. See page 28.
• Replace the drive controller.
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 4: Maintenance and Troubleshooting
06/2004 Configuration Settings Tables
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 89
Drive Controller and Customer ID Drive Controller ATV31...................................................................................
Customer ID no. (if applicable)........................................................................
1st Level Adjustment Parameter
Settings Menu
Code Factory Setting Custom Setting
bFr 50
bFr
SEt-
Code Factory Setting Custom Setting Code Factory Setting Custom Setting
ACC 3 s s rP2 30% %
AC2 5 s s rP3 60% %
dE2 5 s s rP4 90% %
dEC 3 s s SP2 10 Hz Hz
tA1 10% % SP3 15 Hz Hz
tA2 10% % SP4 20 Hz Hz
tA3 10% % SP5 25 Hz Hz
tA4 10% % SP6 30 Hz Hz
LSP 0 Hz Hz SP7 35 Hz Hz
HSP bFr Hz SP8 40 Hz Hz
ItH According to drive rating A SP9 45 Hz Hz
UFr 20% % SP10 50 Hz Hz
FLG 20% % SP11 55 HZ Hz
StA 20% % SP12 60 Hz Hz
SLP 100 Hz % SP13 70 Hz Hz
IdC 0.7 In (1) A SP14 80 Hz Hz
tdC 0.5 s s SP15 90 Hz Hz
tdC1 0.5 s s SP16 100 Hz Hz
SdC1 0.7 In (1) A CLI 1.5 In 1
A
tdC2 0 s s CL2 1.5 In 1 A
SdC2 0.5 In (1) A tLS 0 (no time limit) s
JPF 0 Hz Hz rSL 0
JF2 0 Hz Hz UFr2 20% %
JGF 10 Hz Hz FLG2 20% %
rPG 1 StA2 20% %
rIG 1 / s / s SLP2 100% %
FbS 1 Ftd bFr Hz
PIC nO ttd 100% %
Ctd In 1 A
SdS 30
SFr 4 kHz kHz
1
In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the ATV31 Installation Manual and on the drive controller nameplate.
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function is enabled.
The majority can also be accessed and adjusted in the function configuration menu.
Those which are underlined appear in factory settings mode.
Section 4: Maintenance and Troubleshooting VVDED303042USR6/04
Configuration Settings Tables 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved90
Drive Control
Menu
I/O Menu
Control Menu
drC-
Code Factory Setting Custom Setting Code Factory Setting Custom Setting
bFr 50 Hz Hz tUS tAb
UnS Varies with drive rating V UFt n
FrS 50 Hz Hz nrd YES
nCr Varies with drive rating A SFr 4 kHz kHz
nSP Varies with drive rating RPM tFr 60 Hz Hz
COS Varies with drive rating SSL nO
rSC nO
I-O-
Code Factory Setting Custom Setting Code Factory Setting Custom Setting
tCC
2C
ATV31••••••A: LOC
AO1t 0A
tCt trn dO nO
rrS
if tCC = 2C, LI2
if tCC = 3C, LI3
if tCC = LOC: nO
r1 FLt
CrL3 4 mA mA r2 nO
CrH3 20 mA mA
CtL-
Code Factory Setting Custom Setting Code Factory Setting Custom Setting
LAC L1 Cd2 Mdb
Fr1
AI1
AIP for ATV31••••••A
CCS Cd1
Fr2 nO COp nO
rFC Fr1 LCC nO
CHCF SIM PSt YES
Cd1
tEr
LOC for ATV31••••••A
rOt dFr
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function is enabled.
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 4: Maintenance and Troubleshooting
06/2004 Configuration Settings Tables
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 91
Application Functions Menu
Code Factory Setting Custom Setting Code Factory Setting Custom Setting
rPC-
rPt LIn
JOG-
JOG
If tCC = 2C: nO
If tCC = 3C: LI4
If tCC = LOC: nO
tA1 10% % JGF 10 Hz Hz
tA2 10% %
UPd-
USP nO
tA3 10% % dSP nO
tA4 10% % Str nO
ACC 3 s s
PI-
PIF nO
dEC 3 s s rPG 1
rPS nO rIG 1
Frt 0 Hz FbS 1
AC2 5 s s PIC nO
dE2 5 s s Pr2 nO
brA YES Pr4 nO
StC-
Stt Stn rP2 30% %
FSt nO rP3 60% %
dCF 4 rP4 90% %
dCI nO rSL 0
IdC 0.7 In A PII nO
tdC 0.5 s s rPI 0% %
nSt nO
bLC-
bLC nO
AdC-
AdC YES brL Varies with drive
controller rating
Hz
tdC1 0.5 s s Ibr A
SdC1 0.7 In 1
A brt 0.5 s s
tdC2 0 s s bEn nO Hz
SdC2 0.5 In 1 A bEt 0.5 s s
SAI-
SA2 AI2 bIP nO
SA3 nO
LC2-
LC2 nO
CL2 1.5 In 1 A
1
In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the ATV31 Installation Manual and on the drive controller nameplate.
FUn-
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function is enabled. They can also be accessed in the SEt- menu.
Section 4: Maintenance and Troubleshooting VVDED303042USR6/04
Configuration Settings Tables 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved92
Application Functions Menu (Continued)
Code Factory Setting Custom Setting Code Factory Setting Custom Setting
PSS-
PS2
If tCC = 2C: LI3
If tCC = 3C: LI4
If tCC = LOC: LI3
CHP-
CHP nO
PS4
If tCC = 2C: LI4
If tCC = 3C: nO
If tCC = LOC: LI4
UnS2
Varies with drive
controller rating
V
PS8 nO FrS2 50 Hz Hz
PS16 nO nCr2
Varies with drive
controller rating
A
SP2 10 Hz Hz nSP2 RPM
SP3 15 Hz Hz COS2
SP4 20 Hz Hz UFt2 n
SP5 25 Hz Hz UFr2 20% %
SP6 30 Hz Hz FLG2 20% %
SP7 35 Hz Hz StA2 20% %
SP8 40 Hz Hz SLP2 100 Hz Hz
SP9 45 Hz Hz
LSt-
LAF nO
SP10 50 Hz Hz LAr nO
SP11 55 Hz Hz LAS nSt
SP12 60 Hz Hz
SP13 70 Hz Hz
SP14 80 Hz Hz
SP15 90 Hz Hz
SP16 100 Hz Hz
FUn-
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function is enabled. They can also be accessed in the SEt menu.
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 4: Maintenance and Troubleshooting
06/2004 Configuration Settings Tables
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 93
Fault Menu
Communication Menu
FLt-
Code Factory Setting Custom Setting Code Factory Setting Custom Setting
Atr nO SLL YES
tAr 5 COL YES
rSF nO tnL YES
FLr nO LFL nO
EtF nO LFF 10 Hz Hz
EPL YES drn nO
OPL YES StP nO
IPL YES InH nO
OHL YES rPr nO
OLL YES
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function is enabled.
CON-
Code Factory Setting Custom Setting Code Factory Setting Custom Setting
Add 1 bdCO 125
tbr 19200 FLO nO
tFO 8E1
FLOC
AI1
AIP for ATV31••••••AttO 10 s s
AdCO 0
Section 4: Maintenance and Troubleshooting VVDED303042USR6/04
Index of Parameter Codes 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved94
INDEX OF PARAMETER CODES
Code See Page:
AC2 24
ACC 24
AdC 53
AdCO 80
Add 80
AI1A 84
AI2A 84
AI3A 84
AO1t 84
Atr 77
bdCO 80
bEn 70
bEt 70
bFr 28
bIP 70
bLC 70
brA 50
brL 70
brt 70
CCS 46
Cd1 45
Cd2 45
CHCF 45
CHP 72
CL2 71
CLI 26
COd 84
COp 46
COS 28
COS2 73
CrH3 32
CrL3 32
Ctd 27
dCF 51
dCI 51
dE2 50
dEC 50
dO 32
drn 79
dSP 61
EPL 78
ErCO 80
EtF 78
FbS 26
FCS 30
FLG 25
FLG2 26
FLO 80
FLOC 81
FLr 78
Fr1 44
Fr2 44
FrH 83
FrS 28
FrS2 72
Frt 50
FSt 51
Ftd 27
HSP 24
Ibr 70
IdC 51
InH 79
IPL 78
ItH 24
JF2 26
JGF 26
JOG 58
JPF 26
LAC 44
LAF 74
LAr 74
LAS 74
LC2 71
LCC 46
LCr 83
LFF 79
LFL 79
LFr 83
LFt 83
LI1A 84
LI2A 84
LI3A 84
LI4A 84
LI5A 84
LI6A 84
LIS 84
LSP 24
nCr 28
nCr2 72
nrd 30
nSP 28
nSP2 72
nSt 52
OHL 78
OLL 78
OPL 78
Opr 83
Otr 83
PIC 66
PIF 66
Pr2 66
Pr4 66
PS16 57
PS2 56
PS4 56
PS8 56
PSt 47
r1 32
r2 32
rFC 45
Code See Page:
rFr 83
rIG 66
rOt 47
rP2 66
rP3 66
rP4 66
rPG 66
rPI 67
rPI 83
rPr 79
rPS 50
rPt 49
rrS 31
rSC 29
rSF 77
rSL 67
rtH 83
SA2 54
SA3 54
SCS 30
SdC1 53
SdC2 53
SdS 27
SFr 27
SLL 79
SLP 25
SLP2 73
SP10 57
SP11 57
SP12 57
SP13 57
SP14 57
SP15 57
SP16 57
SP2 57
SP3 57
SP4 57
SP5 57
SP6 57
SP7 57
SP8 57
SP9 57
SPd1 83
SPd2 83
SPd3 83
SSL 30
StA 25
StA2 73
StP 79
Str 61
Stt 51
tA1 24
tA2 24
tA3 24
tA4 24
Code See Page:
tAr 77
tbr 80
tCC 31
tCt 31
tdC 25
tdC1 25
tdC2 25
tFr 30
tHd 83
tHr 83
tLS 26
ttd 27
ttO 80
tUn 29
tUS 29
tUS 84
UdP 84
UFr 25
UFr2 73
UFt 29
UFt2 73
ULn 83
UnS 28
UnS2 72
USP 61
Code See Page:
VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 4: Maintenance and Troubleshooting
06/2004 Index of Functions
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 95
INDEX OF FUNCTIONS
Function See Page:
+/- speed 59
2-wire/3-wire control 31
Analog/logic output AOC/AOV 32
Automatic restart 77
Automatic DC injection 53
Brake control 68
CANopen: Drive address 80
Catch on the fly (automatically catch a spinning load on ramp) 78
Control and reference channels 34
Control channel switching 46
Current limit 26
DC injection via logic input 51
Deceleration ramp adaptation 50
Drive thermal protection 11
Drive ventilation 11
Fast stop via logic input 51
Forced local mode 80
Freewheel stop via logic input 52
Function access level 44
Jog operation 58
Management of limit switch 74
Modbus: Drive address 80
Motor control auto-tuning 29
Motor switching 72
Motor thermal protection 12
Motor thermal protection - max. thermal current 24
PI regulator 62
Preset speeds 55
Ramp switching 50
Ramps 49
Reference switching 45
Relay R1 32
Relay R2 32
Reset of current fault 77
Return to factory settings/restore configuration 30
Saving the configuration 30
Selection of the type of voltage/frequency ratio 29
Skip frequency 26
Stop modes 51
Summing inputs 54
Switching for second current limit 71
Switching frequency 27
Section 4: Maintenance and Troubleshooting VVDED303042USR6/04
Index of Functions 06/2004
© 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved96
Altivar 31 programing
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by qualified
personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of
the use of this material.
VVDED303042USR6/04 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Replaces VVDED303042US dated 03/2004
8001 Hwy 64 East
Raleigh, NC 27545
1-888-SquareD
(1-888-778-2733)
www.us.SquareD.com
06/2004
Schneider Electric USA
Instruction Bulletin
Altivar® 31 Programming Manual

More Related Content

PDF
Case 580 sn loader backhoe operator manual
PDF
An1930
PDF
Case 580 sn wt loader backhoe operator manual
PDF
Case 590 sn loader backhoe operator manual
PDF
Case 580 n loader backhoe operator manual
PDF
Pci 8158 manual-10
PDF
P2021 1 f7035
PDF
Manual de PLC Micrologix 1500
Case 580 sn loader backhoe operator manual
An1930
Case 580 sn wt loader backhoe operator manual
Case 590 sn loader backhoe operator manual
Case 580 n loader backhoe operator manual
Pci 8158 manual-10
P2021 1 f7035
Manual de PLC Micrologix 1500

What's hot (14)

PDF
Cummins onan dskaa generator set with power command 1.1 controller service re...
PDF
PDF
Gigabyte
PDF
Cummins onan dskaa generator set with power command 1.1 controller service re...
PDF
Cummins onan dskab generator set with power command 1.1 controller service re...
PDF
Cummins onan dskca generator set with power command 1.1 controller service re...
PDF
Cummins onan dskba generator set with power command 1.1 controller service re...
PDF
stratix 8000 8300
PDF
Xc instruction manual
PDF
H61 m vs
PDF
Manual mikrotik
Cummins onan dskaa generator set with power command 1.1 controller service re...
Gigabyte
Cummins onan dskaa generator set with power command 1.1 controller service re...
Cummins onan dskab generator set with power command 1.1 controller service re...
Cummins onan dskca generator set with power command 1.1 controller service re...
Cummins onan dskba generator set with power command 1.1 controller service re...
stratix 8000 8300
Xc instruction manual
H61 m vs
Manual mikrotik
Ad

Similar to Altivar 31 programing (20)

PDF
Atv312 programming manual
PDF
Ac drive altivar 12 user manual
PDF
Atv312 programming manual
PDF
Tài liệu huong dan su dung bien tan atv312
PDF
Atv61 programming manual_en_v2
PDF
Atv71 programming
PDF
Atv12
PDF
Atv71 l programming_manual_en_v1
PDF
altivar 11 manual.pdf
PDF
Atv38 manual
PDF
Altivar 28 users_manual
PDF
Altivar 28 users_manual
PDF
52012 008-01 b
PDF
Schneideratv 58 usermanual
Atv312 programming manual
Ac drive altivar 12 user manual
Atv312 programming manual
Tài liệu huong dan su dung bien tan atv312
Atv61 programming manual_en_v2
Atv71 programming
Atv12
Atv71 l programming_manual_en_v1
altivar 11 manual.pdf
Atv38 manual
Altivar 28 users_manual
Altivar 28 users_manual
52012 008-01 b
Schneideratv 58 usermanual
Ad

More from Toàn Huỳnh (20)

PDF
Fr f700
PDF
Ct2000 v english_ver 1.36
PDF
Ct2000 pro plus_manual_english[1]
PDF
Ct2000 f manual_english
PDF
Ct2000 ev manual_english_version 1.1
PDF
Ct2000 es manual_english_version_1[1].0
PDF
En acs880 fw_man_d
PDF
En acs800 standard_fw_l
PDF
En acs150 um rev c_a4_screen
PDF
En ach550 01_um_f_a4_lo_screenres
PDF
En acq810 fw manual b
PDF
En 600stdprg fwmanual
PDF
Acs550 x1-rev e
PDF
Acs550 02-us-04
PDF
PDF
Abb acs850-04-firmware-manual
PDF
Abb acs310-users-guide
PDF
Abb acs55-users-guide
PDF
Sv i s5 user manual-100520
PDF
Sv i p5a-manual_(english)
Fr f700
Ct2000 v english_ver 1.36
Ct2000 pro plus_manual_english[1]
Ct2000 f manual_english
Ct2000 ev manual_english_version 1.1
Ct2000 es manual_english_version_1[1].0
En acs880 fw_man_d
En acs800 standard_fw_l
En acs150 um rev c_a4_screen
En ach550 01_um_f_a4_lo_screenres
En acq810 fw manual b
En 600stdprg fwmanual
Acs550 x1-rev e
Acs550 02-us-04
Abb acs850-04-firmware-manual
Abb acs310-users-guide
Abb acs55-users-guide
Sv i s5 user manual-100520
Sv i p5a-manual_(english)

Recently uploaded (20)

PDF
IFRS Notes in your pocket for study all the time
PPTX
2025 Product Deck V1.0.pptxCATALOGTCLCIA
PDF
Power and position in leadershipDOC-20250808-WA0011..pdf
PDF
BsN 7th Sem Course GridNNNNNNNN CCN.pdf
PDF
Keppel_Proposed Divestment of M1 Limited
PDF
NEW - FEES STRUCTURES (01-july-2024).pdf
PDF
Solara Labs: Empowering Health through Innovative Nutraceutical Solutions
PPT
340036916-American-Literature-Literary-Period-Overview.ppt
PPTX
Board-Reporting-Package-by-Umbrex-5-23-23.pptx
PDF
Tata consultancy services case study shri Sharda college, basrur
PDF
SBI Securities Weekly Wrap 08-08-2025_250808_205045.pdf
PPTX
CkgxkgxydkydyldylydlydyldlyddolydyoyyU2.pptx
PDF
Solaris Resources Presentation - Corporate August 2025.pdf
PPTX
Business Ethics - An introduction and its overview.pptx
PDF
Digital Marketing & E-commerce Certificate Glossary.pdf.................
PDF
Nante Industrial Plug Factory: Engineering Quality for Modern Power Applications
PDF
Module 2 - Modern Supervison Challenges - Student Resource.pdf
PDF
Module 3 - Functions of the Supervisor - Part 1 - Student Resource (1).pdf
PDF
Comments on Crystal Cloud and Energy Star.pdf
PDF
SIMNET Inc – 2023’s Most Trusted IT Services & Solution Provider
IFRS Notes in your pocket for study all the time
2025 Product Deck V1.0.pptxCATALOGTCLCIA
Power and position in leadershipDOC-20250808-WA0011..pdf
BsN 7th Sem Course GridNNNNNNNN CCN.pdf
Keppel_Proposed Divestment of M1 Limited
NEW - FEES STRUCTURES (01-july-2024).pdf
Solara Labs: Empowering Health through Innovative Nutraceutical Solutions
340036916-American-Literature-Literary-Period-Overview.ppt
Board-Reporting-Package-by-Umbrex-5-23-23.pptx
Tata consultancy services case study shri Sharda college, basrur
SBI Securities Weekly Wrap 08-08-2025_250808_205045.pdf
CkgxkgxydkydyldylydlydyldlyddolydyoyyU2.pptx
Solaris Resources Presentation - Corporate August 2025.pdf
Business Ethics - An introduction and its overview.pptx
Digital Marketing & E-commerce Certificate Glossary.pdf.................
Nante Industrial Plug Factory: Engineering Quality for Modern Power Applications
Module 2 - Modern Supervison Challenges - Student Resource.pdf
Module 3 - Functions of the Supervisor - Part 1 - Student Resource (1).pdf
Comments on Crystal Cloud and Energy Star.pdf
SIMNET Inc – 2023’s Most Trusted IT Services & Solution Provider

Altivar 31 programing

  • 1. Instruction Bulletin Retain for future use. Altivar® 31 Adjustable Speed Drive Controllers Programming Manual
  • 3. VVDED303042USR6/04 Altivar® 31 Programming Manual 06/2004 Contents © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 3 SECTION 1: INTRODUCTION Product Range ............................................................................................ 5 About This Document ................................................................................. 5 Hazard Categories and Special Symbols ................................................... 6 Product Support .......................................................................................... 6 Start-Up Overview ....................................................................................... 7 Preliminary Recommendations ................................................................... 8 Precautions ........................................................................................... 8 Starting from Line Power ....................................................................... 9 Power Up after a Manual Fault Reset or Stop Command ..................... 9 Test on a Low Power Motor or without a Motor ..................................... 9 Using Motors in Parallel ........................................................................ 9 Operation on an Impedance Grounded System .................................... 9 Programming Recommendations .......................................................... 9 Factory Settings ........................................................................................ 10 Drive Thermal Protection .......................................................................... 11 Ventilation ............................................................................................ 11 Motor Thermal Protection ......................................................................... 12 SECTION 2: PROGRAMMING Drive Keypad Display ................................................................................ 14 ATV31•••••• Controllers ....................................................................... 14 ATV31••••••A Controllers ..................................................................... 14 Key Functions ...................................................................................... 15 nSt: Freewheel Stop ............................................................................ 15 Remote Keypad Display ........................................................................... 16 Saving and Loading Configurations .................................................... 16 Accessing the Menus ................................................................................ 17 Accessing the Parameters ........................................................................ 18 bFr Parameter ..................................................................................... 18 Function Compatibility ............................................................................... 19 Logic and Analog Input Application Functions .......................................... 20 SECTION 3: MENUS Settings Menu SEt- ................................................................................... 23 Drive Control Menu drC- ........................................................................... 27 I/O Menu I-O- ............................................................................................ 31 Control Menu CtL- ..................................................................................... 34 Control Channels ................................................................................. 34 Parameter LAC .................................................................................... 35 Parameter LAC = L1 or L2 .................................................................. 36 Parameter LAC = L3 ........................................................................... 37 Reference Channel for LAC = L1 or .................................................... 39 Control Channel for LAC = L1 or L2 .................................................... 40 Reference Channel for LAC = L3 ........................................................ 41 Control Channel for LAC = L3: CHCF = SIM, Combined Reference and Control ................................ 42 Control Channel for LAC = L3: CHCF = SEP, Mixed Mode (Separate Reference and Control) .......... 43 Application Functions Menu FUn- ............................................................. 48 Summing Inputs .................................................................................. 54 Preset Speeds ..................................................................................... 55 +/- Speed ............................................................................................. 59 PI Regulator ........................................................................................ 62 Manual–Automatic Operation with PI Regulator ................................. 64 Brake Control ...................................................................................... 68 Management of Limit Switches ........................................................... 74 Fault Menu FLt- ......................................................................................... 76 Communication Menu COM- .................................................................... 80 Display Menu SUP- ................................................................................... 82
  • 4. Altivar® 31 Programming Manual VVDED303042USR6/04 Contents 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved4 SECTION 4: MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLE- SHOOTING Precautions ...............................................................................................85 Routine Maintenance ................................................................................85 Normal Display ...........................................................................................85 Fault Display .............................................................................................85 Drive Controller Does Not Start, No Fault Displayed ...........................85 Clearing Faults ....................................................................................86 Faults Which Cannot Be Automatically Reset .....................................86 Faults Which Can Be Automatically Reset ..........................................87 Faults That Reset When the Fault Is Cleared .....................................88 Configuration Settings Tables ...................................................................88 Drive Controller and Customer ID .......................................................89 1st Level Adjustment Parameter ...........................................................89 Settings Menu ......................................................................................89 Drive Control Menu ..............................................................................90 I/O Menu ..............................................................................................90 Control Menu .......................................................................................90 Application Functions Menu ................................................................91 Fault Menu ...........................................................................................93 Communication Menu ..........................................................................93 Index of Parameter Codes ........................................................................94 Index of Functions .....................................................................................95
  • 5. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 1: Introduction 06/2004 Product Range © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 5 SECTION 1: INTRODUCTION PRODUCT RANGE The Altivar 31 (ATV31) family of adjustable frequency AC drive controllers is used for controlling three-phase asynchronous motors. The controllers range from: • 0.25 to 3 hp (0.18 to 2.2 kW), 208/230/240 V, single-phase input • 0.25 to 20 hp (0.18 to 15 kW), 208/230/240 V, three-phase input • 0.5 to 20 hp (0.37 to 15 kW), 400/460/480 V, three-phase input • 1 to 20 hp (0.75 to 15 kW), 525/575/600 V, three-phase input Some ATV31 controllers are available with a reference potentiometer, a run button, and a stop/reset button. These controllers are designated as ATV31••••••A controllers throughout this manual. The symbol “•” in a catalog number designates parts of the number that vary with the rating. ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT This manual contains programming instructions for ATV31 drive controllers. The following documentation is also provided with the controller: • Altivar 31 Installation Manual, VVDED303041US • Altivar 31 Start-Up Guide, VVDED303043US Refer to the ATV31 Installation Manual for instructions on receiving, inspection, mounting, installation, and wiring. Refer to the ATV31 Start-Up Guide for instructions on bringing the drive controller into service with the factory configuration. Refer to the Index of Parameter Codes and the Index of Functions on pages 94–95 of for an alphabetical index of the codes and functions discussed in this manual. NOTE: Throughout this manual, and on the drive keypad display, a dash appears after menu and sub-menu codes to differentiate them from parameter codes. For example, SEt- is a menu, but ACC is a parameter.
  • 6. Section 1: Introduction VVDED303042USR6/04 Hazard Categories and Special Symbols 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved6 HAZARD CATEGORIES AND SPECIAL SYMBOLS The following symbols and special messages may appear in this manual or on the equipment to warn of potential hazards. A lightening bolt or ANSI man symbol in a “Danger” or “Warning” safety label on the equipment indicates an electrical hazard which will result in personal injury if the instructions are not followed. An exclamation point symbol in a safety message in the manual indicates potential personal injury hazards. Obey all safety messages introduced by this symbol to avoid possible injury or death. PRODUCT SUPPORT For support and assistance, contact the Product Support Group. The Product Support Group is staffed from 8:00 am until 6:00 pm Eastern time to assist with product selection, start-up, and diagnosis of product or application problems. Emergency phone support is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. Symbol Name Lightening Bolt ANSI Man Exclamation Point DANGER DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. WARNING WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, can result in death or serious injury. CAUTION CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, can result in minor or moderate injury. CAUTION CAUTION, used without the safety alert symbol, indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, can result in property damage. Telephone 919-266-8600 Toll Free 888-Square D (888-778-2733) E-mail drive.products.support@us.schneider-electric.com Fax 919-217-6508
  • 7. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 1: Introduction 06/2004 Start-Up Overview © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7 START-UP OVERVIEW The following procedure is an overview of the minimum steps necessary for bringing an ATV31 drive controller into service. Refer to the ATV31 Installation Manual for the mounting, wiring, and bus voltage measurement steps. Refer to the appropriate sections of this manual for the programming steps. 1. Mount the drive controller. Refer to the ATV31 Installation Manual. 2. Make the following connections to the drive controller. Refer to the ATV31 Installation Manual: — Connect the grounding conductors. — Connect the line supply. Ensure that it is within the voltage range of the drive controller. — Connect the motor. Ensure that its rating corresponds to the drive controller’s voltage. 3. Power up the drive controller, but do not give a run command. 4. Configure bFr (motor nominal frequency) if it is other than 50 Hz. bFr appears on the display the first time the drive controller is powered up. It can be accessed in the drC- menu (page 27) anytime. 5. Configure the parameters in the drC- menu if the factory configuration is not suitable. Refer to page 10 for the factory settings. 6. Configure the parameters in the I-O-, CtL-, and FUn- menus if the factory configuration is not suitable. Refer to page 10 for the factory settings. 7. Configure the following parameters in the SEt- menu (pages 23–27): — ACC (acceleration) and dEC (deceleration) — LSP (low speed when the reference is zero) and HSP (high speed when the reference is at its maximum) — ItH (motor thermal protection) 8. Remove power from the drive controller and follow the bus voltage measurement procedure in the ATV31 Installation Manual. Then connect the control wiring to the logic and analog inputs. 9. Power up the drive controller, then issue a run command via the logic input (refer to the ATV31 Start-Up Guide). 10. Adjust the speed reference.
  • 8. Section 1: Introduction VVDED303042USR6/04 Preliminary Recommendations 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved8 PRELIMINARY RECOMMENDATIONS Precautions Before powering up and configuring the drive controller, read and observe the following precautions. DANGER UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION • Before powering up and configuring the drive controller, ensure that the logic inputs are switched off (State 0) to prevent unintended starting. • An input assigned to the run command may cause the motor to start immediately upon exiting the configuration menus. Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury. WARNING LOSS OF CONTROL • The designer of any control scheme must consider the potential failure modes of control paths and, for certain critical control functions, provide a means to achieve a safe state during and after a path failure. • Examples of critical control functions are Emergency Stop and Overtravel Stop. • Separate or redundant control paths must be provided for critical control functions. Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage. CAUTION DAMAGED EQUIPMENT Do not operate or install any drive controller that appears damaged. Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage.
  • 9. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 1: Introduction 06/2004 Preliminary Recommendations © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 9 Starting from Line Power If you are starting the drive controller from line power, ensure that parameter tCt is not set to trn (see page 31) and limit operations of the line contactor to fewer than one per minute to avoid premature failure of the filter capacitors and precharge resistors. The recommended method of control is through inputs LI1 to LI6. The motor thermal state memory returns to zero when line power is removed from the drive controller. Power Up after a Manual Fault Reset or Stop Command If parameter tCt is at its factory setting (trn), when the drive controller is powered up after a manual fault reset or a stop command, the forward, reverse, and DC injection stop commands must be reset for the drive controller to start. If they are not reset, the drive controller will display nSt and will not start. If automatic restart is configured (parameter Atr in the FLt- menu, see page 77) the reset is not necessary. Test on a Low Power Motor or without a Motor With the factory configuration, motor phase loss detection (OPL) is active. To check the drive controller in a test or maintenance environment without having to switch to a motor with the same rating as the drive controller, disable motor phase loss detection and configure the voltage/frequency ratio (UFt) to L, constant torque (see page 29). The drive controller will not provide motor thermal protection if the motor current is less than 0.2 times the nominal drive current. Using Motors in Parallel When using motors in parallel, configure the voltage/frequency ratio, UFt, to L (constant torque) and provide an alternate means of thermal protection on every motor. The drive controller cannot provide adequate motor thermal protection for each motor. Operation on an Impedance Grounded System When using the drive controller on a system with an isolated or impedance grounded neutral, use a permanent insulation monitor compatible with non- linear loads. ATV31••••••M21 and N4 drive controllers feature built-in radio frequency interference (RFI) filters which have capacitors to ground. These filters can be disconnected from ground when using the drive controller on an impedance grounded system to increase the operating life of their capacitors. Refer to the ATV31 Installation Manual for more information. Programming Recommendations Refer to “Start-Up Overview” on page 7 for the minimum programming steps necessary for bringing the drive controller into service. Use the configuration settings tables beginning on page 89 to prepare and record the drive configuration before programming the drive controller. It is always possible to return to the factory settings by setting the FCS parameter to InI in the drC-, I-O-, CtL-, or FUn- menus. See pages 30, 33, 47, and 75. When first commissioning an ATV31 drive controller for a 60 Hz system, perform a factory parameter reset. Be sure to set bFr to 60 Hz. We recommend using the auto-tuning function to optimize the drive controller’s accuracy and response time. Auto-tuning measures the stator resistance of the motor to optimize the control algorithms. See page 29. 1 Throughout this manual, the symbol “•” in a catalog number denotes the portion of the number that varies with the drive controller rating.
  • 10. Section 1: Introduction VVDED303042USR6/04 Factory Settings 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved10 FACTORY SETTINGS The ATV31 drive controller is supplied ready for use in most applications, with the factory settings shown in Table 1. Table 1: Factory Settings Function Code Factory Setting Display — rdY with motor stopped, motor frequency (for example, 50 Hz) with motor running Motor frequency bFr 50 Hz Type of voltage/frequency ratio UFt n: sensorless flux vector control for constant torque applications Normal stop mode Stt Stn: normal stop on deceleration ramp Stop mode in the event of a fault EPL YES: freewheel stop Linear ramps ACC, dEC 3 seconds Low speed LSP 0 Hz High speed HSP 50 Hz Frequency loop gain FLG, StA Standard Motor thermal current ItH Nominal motor current (value depends on the drive controller rating) DC injection braking SdC 0.7 x nominal drive controller current for 0.5 seconds Deceleration ramp adaptation brA YES: automatic adaptation of the deceleration ramp in the event of overvoltage on braking Automatic restart Atr nO: no automatic restart after a fault Switching frequency SFr 4 kHz Logic inputs LI1, LI2 2-wire transition detection control: LI1 = forward, LI2 = reverse. Not assigned on ATV31••••••A1 drive controllers 1 ATV31••••••A range drive controllers have a reference potentiometer, a run button, and a stop/reset button. They are factory set for local control with the run button, the stop/reset button, and the reference potentiometer active. Logic inputs LI1 and LI2 and analog input AI1 are inactive (not assigned). LI3, LI4 4 preset speeds: speed 1 = speed reference or LSP (see page 24) speed 2 = 10 Hz speed 3 = 15 Hz speed 4 = 20 Hz LI5, LI6 Not assigned Analog inputs AI1 Speed reference 0–10 V. Not assigned on ATV31••••••A1 drive controllers. AI2 Summed speed reference input 0 ±10 V AI3 4–20 mA, not assigned Relays R1 The contact opens in the event of a fault or if power is removed from the drive controller. R2 Not assigned Analog output AOC 0–20 mA, not assigned
  • 11. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 1: Introduction 06/2004 Drive Thermal Protection © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11 DRIVE THERMAL PROTECTION Thermal protection of the drive controller is achieved with a positive temperature coefficient (PTC) resistor on the heatsink or power module. In the event of an overcurrent, the drive controller trips to protect itself against overloads. Typical tripping points are: • Motor current is 185% of nominal drive controller current for 2 seconds • Motor current is 150% of nominal drive controller current for 60 seconds Ventilation The fan starts when the drive controller is powered up, but stops after 10 seconds if a run command is not received. The fan starts automatically when the drive controller receives an operating direction and reference. It stops a few seconds after motor speed is less than 0.2 Hz and injection braking is completed. 1.11 1000 3000 5000 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 60 100 160 2 0 200 Time (seconds) Motor current/drive controller In
  • 12. Section 1: Introduction VVDED303042USR6/04 Motor Thermal Protection 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved12 MOTOR THERMAL PROTECTION Motor thermal protection is achieved by continuous calculation of heat energy (I2 t). The protection is available for self-cooled motors. NOTE: The motor thermal state memory returns to zero when line power is removed from the drive controller. Refer to “Preliminary Recommendations” on pages 8–9 for more information about external overload protection. CAUTION INADEQUATE MOTOR THERMAL PROTECTION The use of external overload protection is required under the following conditions: • Starting from line power • Running multiple motors • Running motors rated at less than 0.2 times the nominal drive current • Using motor switching Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage. 10,000 1,000 100 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 50 Hz20 Hz10 Hz 1 Hz 3 Hz 5 Hz Motor current/ItH Trip time in seconds
  • 13. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 2: Programming 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 13 SECTION 2: PROGRAMMING DANGER UNQUALIFIED USER • This equipment must be installed, programmed, and serviced only by qualified personnel. • The application of this product requires expertise in the design and programming of control systems. Only persons with such expertise should be allowed to program, install, alter, and apply this product. • Qualified personnel performing diagnostics or troubleshooting that requires electrical conductors to be energized must comply with NFPA 70 E - Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces and OSHA Standards - 29 CFR Part 1910 Subpart S Electrical. Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
  • 14. Section 2: Programming VVDED303042USR6/04 Drive Keypad Display 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved14 DRIVE KEYPAD DISPLAY ATV31•••••• Controllers ATV31••••••A Controllers ATV31••••••A controllers have a reference potentiometer, a run button, and a stop/reset button. Altivar 31 ESC ENT RUN ERR CAN Four 7-segment displays Enters a menu or a parameter, or saves the displayed parameter or value Returns to the previous menu or parameter, or increases the displayed value Exits a menu or parameter, or clears the displayed value to return to the previous stored value Advances to the next menu or parameter, or decreases the displayed value Red LED DC bus ON 2 CANopen status LEDs Altivar 31 RUN ESC ENT STOP RESET RUN ERR CAN Reference potentiometer: Active if parameter Fr1 in the CtL- menu is configured as AIP (see page 44) Four 7-segment displays Enters a menu or a parameter, or saves the displayed parameter or value Returns to the previous menu or parameter, or increases the displayed value Exits a menu or a parameter, or clears the displayed value to return to the previous stored value Advances to the next menu or parameter, or decreases the displayed value STOP/RESET button Resets faults Stops the motor: • If tCC (I-O- menu) is not configured as LOC, pressing the STOP/RESET key commands a freewheel stop. • If tCC (I-O- menu) is configured as LOC, stopping is on a ramp, but if injection braking is in progress, a freewheel stop takes place. RUN button: Starts the motor in forward direction if parameter tCC in the I-O- menu is configured as LOC (see page 31) Red LED DC bus ON 2 CANopen status LEDs
  • 15. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 2: Programming 06/2004 Drive Keypad Display © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 15 Key Functions • Press and hold down (longer than 2 seconds) the or keys to scroll through the data quickly. • Pressing or does not store the selection. • To store the selection, press the key.The display flashes when a value is stored. A normal display with no fault present and no run command shows: • The value of one of the display parameters (see page 82). The default display is motor frequency, for example 43.0. In current limiting mode, the display flashes. • init: Initialization sequence • rdY: Drive ready • dcb: DC injection braking in progress • nSt: Freewheel stop. See the following section. • FSt: Fast stop • tUn: Auto-tuning in progress If a fault is present, the display flashes. nSt: Freewheel Stop If the display shows the code nSt, one of the following conditions is indicated: 1. With the factory configuration, when the drive controller is powered up after a manual fault reset or stop command, the forward, reverse, and DC injection stop commands must be reset for the drive controller to start. If they are not reset, the drive controller will display nSt and will not start. If automatic restart is configured, the reset is not necessary. 2. If the reference channel or the control channel is assigned to Modbus or CANopen (see page 34), the drive controller will display nSt on power up and remain stopped until the communication bus sends a command. 3. If a forward or reverse run command is present when the drive controller is powered up and the drive controller is set for 3-wire control or for 2-wire control with “trn” transition (see page 31), the drive controller will display nSt and will not run until the run command is cycled and a valid speed reference is given. ENT
  • 16. Section 2: Programming VVDED303042USR6/04 Remote Keypad Display 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved16 REMOTE KEYPAD DISPLAY The optional remote keypad display is a local control unit that can be wall- mounted on the door of an enclosure. It has a cable with connectors for connection to the drive serial link (refer to the manual supplied with the display). The remote keypad display has the same display and programming buttons as the drive controller, with the addition of a switch to lock access to the menu and three buttons for commanding the drive controller: • FWD/REV commands the direction of rotation. • RUN commands the motor to run. • STOP/RESET commands the motor to stop or resets a fault. Pressing the STOP/RESET button once stops the motor; pressing it a second time stops DC injection braking if it is configured. In order for the remote keypad display to be active, the tbr parameter in the COM- menu must remain at the factory setting, 19.2 (19,200 bps, see page 80). NOTE: Password protection has priority over the access locking switch. See page 84. Placing the access locking switch in the locked position also prevents the drive settings from being accessed via the drive controller keypad. When the remote keypad display is disconnected, if the access locking switch is in the locked position, the drive controller keypad also remains locked. Saving and Loading Configurations Up to four complete configurations can be stored in the remote keypad display and transferred to other drive controllers of the same rating. Four different operations for the same device can also be stored on the terminal. See the SCS and FCS parameters in the drC-, I-O-, CtL-, or FUn- menus. See pages 30, 33, 47, and 75. ESC ENT RUNFWD REV STOP RESET 4-character display Connector Access locking switch: • Positions: settings and display are accessible (SEt- and SUP- menus) • Position: all menus can be accessed
  • 17. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 2: Programming 06/2004 Accessing the Menus © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 17 ACCESSING THE MENUS For added convenience, some parameters can be accessed in more than one menu. For example, return to factory settings (FCS) and saving the configuration (SCS) are available in multiple menus. NOTE: Throughout this guide, a dash appears after menu codes to differentiate them from parameter codes. For example, SEt- is a menu, but ACC is a parameter. XXX bFr FLt- SUP- CON- SEt- FUn- CtL- I-O- drC- ESC ESC ESC ESC ESC ESC ESC ESC ESC ENT ENT ENT ESC ENT ESC ENT ESC ENT ESC ENT ESC ENT ESC ENT ESC ENT ESC Displays drive controller status (variable, see page 15) Motor frequency (The factory setting is only visible the first time the drive is powered up. See page 18.) Drive control (page 27) Faults (page 76) Communication (page 80) Monitoring (page 82) Settings (page 23) Menus I/O (page 31) Control (page 34) Functions (page 48) Power-up
  • 18. Section 2: Programming VVDED303042USR6/04 Accessing the Parameters 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved18 ACCESSING THE PARAMETERS The following figure illustrates how to access parameters and assign their values. To store the parameter value, press the key. The display flashes when a value is stored. All of the menus are drop-down type menus. Once you have reached the last parameter in a list, press the key to return to the first parameter. From the first parameter in the list, press the key to jump to the last parameter. If you have modified a parameter in a menu and you return to that menu without accessing another menu in the meantime, you will be taken directly to the parameter you last modified. See the illustration below. If you have accessed another menu or have restarted the drive controller since the modification, you will be taken to the first parameter in the menu. See the illustration above. bFr Parameter Motor frequency, bFr, can only be modified when the drive controller is stopped and not receiving a run command. ENT ACC 15.0 ENT ESC ENT ESC 26.0 26.0 ESC dEC ENT SEt- Menu Parameter Value Assignment The display flashes when a value is stored. Next Parameter ENT ESC 1st nth last Menu ENT ESC 1st nth last Menu Code Description Adjustment range Factory setting bFr Motor frequency 50 or 60 Hz 50 Hz This is the first parameter displayed when the drive controller is first powered up. bFr can be modified at any time in the drC- menu. Modifying this parameter also modifies the values of the following parameters: HSP (page 24), Ftd (page 27), FrS (page 28), and tFr (page 30).
  • 19. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 2: Programming 06/2004 Function Compatibility © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 19 FUNCTION COMPATIBILITY Automatic restart, catch on the fly, and reverse direction are only available as described below: • Automatic restart is only available in 2-wire control (tCC = 2C and tCt = LEL or PFO, see page 31). • Catch on the fly is only available in 2-wire control (tCC = 2C and tCt = LEL or PFO, see page 31). It is deactivated if automatic DC injection braking is configured as DC (AdC = Ct, see page 53). • Reverse direction is only available on ATV31••••••A controllers if local control is active (tCC = LOC, see page 31). The choice of application functions is limited by the number of I/O available and by the fact that some functions are incompatible with one another as illustrated in the figure below. Functions which are not listed in the figure are fully compatible. If there is an incompatibility between functions, the first function configured will prevent the others from being configured. Stop functions have priority over run commands. Speed references via logic command have priority over analog references. Summinginputs +/-Speed1 1 Excluding a special application with reference channel Fr2 (see pages 39 and 41). Managementoflimitswitches Presetspeeds PIregulator Jogoperation Brakesequence DCinjectionstop Faststop Freewheelstop Summing inputs +/- Speed 1 Management of limit switches Preset speeds  PI regulator Jog operation   Brake sequence DC injection stop Fast stop Freewheel stop   Incompatible functions Compatible functions Not applicable  Functions which cannot be active at the same time. The arrow points to the function that has priority.
  • 20. Section 2: Programming VVDED303042USR6/04 Logic and Analog Input Application Functions 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved20 LOGIC AND ANALOG INPUT APPLICATION FUNCTIONS Tables 2–5 list the functions that can be assigned to the logic and analog inputs and their factory assignments. A single input can activate several functions at the same time. For example, reverse and second ramp can be assigned to one input. When more than one function is assigned to an input, ensure that the functions are compatible. Use the LIA- and AIA- sub-menus of the SUP- menu (see page 84) to display the functions assigned to the inputs and to check their compatibility. Table 2: Logic Inputs Function Code See Page: Factory Setting ATV31•••••• ATV31••••••A Not assigned — — LI5–LI6 LI1–LI2 LI5–LI6 Forward — — LI1 2 preset speeds PS2 56 LI3 LI3 4 preset speeds PS4 56 LI4 LI4 8 preset speeds PS8 56 — — 16 preset speeds PS16 57 — — 2 preset PI references Pr2 66 — — 4 preset PI references Pr4 66 — — + speed USP 61 — — - speed dSP 61 — — Jog operation JOG 58 — — Ramp switching rPS 50 — — Switching for 2nd current limit LC2 71 — — Fast stop via logic input FSt 51 — — DC injection via logic input dCI 51 — — Freewheel stop via logic input nSt 52 — — Reverse rrS 31 LI2 — External fault EtF 78 — — RESET (fault reset) rSF 77 — — Forced local mode FLO 80 — — Reference switching rFC 45 — — Control channel switching CCS 46 — — Motor switching CHP 72 — — Limiting of forward motion (limit switch) LAF 74 — — Limiting of reverse motion (limit switch) LAr 74 — — Fault inhibit InH 79 — — Table 3: Analog Inputs Function Code See Page: Factory Setting ATV31•••••• ATV31••••••A Not assigned — — AI3 AI1 - AI3 Reference 1 Fr1 44 AI1 AIP (potentiometer) Reference 2 Fr2 44 — Summing input 2 SA2 54 AI2 AI2 Summing input 3 SA3 54 — — PI regulator feedback PIF 66 — —
  • 21. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 2: Programming 06/2004 Logic and Analog Input Application Functions © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 21 Table 4: Analog and Logic Outputs Function Code See Page: Factory Setting Not assigned — — AOC/AOV Motor current OCr 32 — Motor frequency rFr 32 — Motor torque OLO 32 — Power supplied by the drive controller OPr 32 — Drive fault (logic data) FLt 32 — Drive running (logic data) rUn 32 — Frequency threshold reached (logic data) FtA 32 — High speed (HSP) reached (logic data) FLA 32 — Current threshold reached (logic data) CtA 32 — Frequency reference reached (logic data) SrA 32 — Motor thermal threshold reached (logic data) tSA 32 — Brake sequence (logic data) bLC 32 — Table 5: Relays Function Code See Page: Factory Setting Not assigned — — R2 Drive fault FLt 32 R1 Drive running rUn 32 — Frequency threshold reached FtA 32 — High speed (HSP) reached FLA 32 — Current threshold reached CtA 32 — Frequency reference reached SrA 32 — Motor thermal threshold reached tSA 32 — Brake sequence bLC 32 —
  • 22. Section 2: Programming VVDED303042USR6/04 Logic and Analog Input Application Functions 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved22
  • 23. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus 06/2004 Settings Menu SEt- © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 23 SECTION 3: MENUS SETTINGS MENU SEt- The parameters in the SEt- menu can be modified with the drive controller running or stopped. However, we recommend making modifications to the settings with the drive controller stopped. DANGER UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Ensure that changes to the operating settings do not present any danger, especially when making adjustments while the drive controller is running the motor. Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury. CAUTION MOTOR OVERHEATING • This drive controller does not provide direct thermal protection for the motor. • Use of a thermal sensor in the motor may be required for protection at all speeds or loading conditions. • Consult the motor manufacturer for the thermal capability of the motor when operated over the desired speed range. Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage. rPI LFrSEt- ACC SdS ENT ENT ESC ESC ENT ESC ESC ESC ESC ENT ESC ENT ESC Speed reference from the remote keypad Scale factor for SPd1–SPd3 parameters
  • 24. Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04 Settings Menu SEt- 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved24 Code Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting LFr1 Speed reference from the remote keypad. 0 to HSP This parameter appears if LCC = YES (page 46) or if Fr1/Fr2 = LCC (page 44), and if the remote keypad is online. In this case, LFr can also be accessed via the drive controller keypad. LFr is reset to 0 when the drive controller is powered down. rPI1 Internal PI regulator reference See page 62. 0.0 to 100% 0 ACC Acceleration ramp time 0.1 to 999.9 s 3 s Defined as the time it takes for the motor to go from 0 Hz to FrS (nominal frequency, see page 28). AC2 2nd acceleration ramp time See page 50. 0.1 to 999.9 s 5 s dE2 2nd deceleration ramp time See page 50. 0.1 to 999.9 s 5 s dEC Deceleration ramp time 0.1 to 999.9 s 3 s Defined as the time it takes for the motor to go from FrS (nominal frequency, see page 28) to 0 Hz. Ensure that dEC is not set too low for the load. tA1 Start of custom acceleration ramp, rounded as a percentage of total ramp time (ACC or AC2) See page 49. 0 to 100 10% tA2 End of custom acceleration ramp, rounded as a percentage of total ramp time (ACC or AC2) See page 49. 0 to (100-tA1) 10% tA3 Start of custom deceleration ramp, rounded as a percentage of total ramp time (dEC or dE2) See page 49. 0 to 100 10% tA4 End of custom deceleration ramp, rounded as a percentage of total ramp time (dEC or dE2) See page 49. 0 to (100-tA3) 10% LSP Low speed 0 to HSP 0 Hz Minimum reference HSP High speed LSP to tFr bFr Maximum reference. Ensure that this setting is suitable for the motor and the application. ItH Current used for motor thermal protection. 0.2 to 1.5 In2 Varies with drive controller rating Set ItH to the full-load amperes (FLA) indicated on the motor nameplate. Refer to OLL on page 78 if you wish to suppress motor thermal protection. 1 Also accessible in the SUP- menu. 2 In is the nominal drive controller current indicated on the drive controller nameplate. SEt- These parameters appear regardless of how the other menus have been configured. They only appear in the Settings menu. These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. To facilitate programming, they can also be accessed and adjusted from the menu where the corresponding function is found. A detailed description of these functions can be found on the indicated pages.
  • 25. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus 06/2004 Settings Menu SEt- © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 25 Code Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting UFr IR compensation or voltage boost 0 to 100% 20 If UFt (page 29) = n or nLd, UFr is IR compensation. If UFt = L or P, UFr is voltage boost. Used to optimize torque at very low speed. Increase UFr if the torque is insufficient. To avoid operating instability, ensure that the value of UFr is not too high for a warm motor. NOTE: Modifying UFt (page 29) will cause UFr to return to the factory setting (20%). FLG Frequency loop gain 1 to 100% 20 This parameter can only be accessed if UFt (page 29) = n or nLd. FLG adjusts the speed ramp based on the inertia of the driven load. If the value is too low, the response time is longer. If the value is too high, operating instability can result. StA Frequency loop stability 1 to 100% 20 This parameter can only be accessed if UFt (page 29) = n or nLd. After a period of acceleration or deceleration, StA adapts the return to a steady state to the dynamics of the machine. If the value is too low, overspeed or operating instability can result. If the value is too high, the response time is longer. SLP Slip compensation 0 to 150% 100 This parameter can only be accessed if UFt (page 29) = n or nLd. SLP adjusts slip compensation for fine tuning of speed regulation. If the slip setting < actual slip, the motor is not rotating at the correct speed in steady state. If the slip setting > actual slip, the motor is overcompensated and the speed is unstable. IdC Level of DC injection braking current activated via a logic input or selected as a stop mode.1 See page 51. 0 to In (In is the nominal drive controller current indicated on the nameplate.) 0.7 In tdC Total DC injection braking time selected as a stop mode.1 See page 51. 0.1 to 30 s 0.5 s tdC1 Automatic DC injection time See page 53. 0.1 to 30 s 0.5 s SdC1 Level of automatic DC injection current See page 53. 0 to 1.2 In 0.7 In tdC2 2nd automatic DC injection time See page 53. 0 to 30 s 0 s SdC2 2nd level of DC injection current See page 53. 0 to 1.2 In 0.5 In 1 These settings are not related to the Automatic DC Injection function. SEt- 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 -10 10 20 30 40 0 50 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 -10 10 20 30 40 0 50 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 -10 10 20 30 40 0 50 t Hz t Hz t HzFLG low FLG correct FLG high In this case, increase FLG In this case, reduce FLG 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 t -10 10 20 30 40 0 50 Hz 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 t -10 10 20 30 40 0 50 Hz 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 t -10 10 20 30 40 0 50 HzStA low StA correct StA high In this case, increase StA In this case, reduce StA These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. To facilitate programming, they can also be accessed and adjusted from the menu where the corresponding function is found. A detailed description of these functions can be found on the indicated pages.
  • 26. Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04 Settings Menu SEt- 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved26 Code Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting JPF Skip frequency 0 to 500 0 Hz JPF prevents prolonged operation at a frequency range of ± 1 Hz around JPF. This function avoids a critical speed which leads to resonance. Setting the function to 0 renders it inactive. JF2 2nd skip frequency 0 to 500 0 Hz JF2 prevents prolonged operation at a frequency range of ± 1 Hz around JF2. This function avoids a critical speed which leads to resonance. Setting the function to 0 renders it inactive. JGF Jog operating frequency See page 58. 0 to 10 Hz 10 Hz rPG PI regulator proportional gain See page 66. 0.01 to 100 1 rIG PI regulator integral gain See page 66. 0.01 to 100/s 1/s FbS PI feedback multiplication coefficient See page 66. 0.1 to 100 1 PIC Reversal of the direction of correction of the PI regulator See page 66. nO - YES nO rP2 2nd preset PI reference See page 66. 0 to 100% 30% rP3 3rd preset PI reference See page 66. 0 to 100% 60% rP4 4th preset PI reference See page 66. 0 to 100% 90% SP2 2nd preset speed See page 57. 0 to 500 Hz 10 Hz SP3 3rd preset speed See page 57. 0 to 500 Hz 15 Hz SP4 4th preset speed See page 57. 0 to 500 Hz 20 Hz SP5 5th preset speed See page 57. 0 to 500 Hz 25 Hz SP6 6th preset speed See page 57. 0 to 500 Hz 30 Hz SP7 7th preset speed See page 57. 0 to 500 Hz 35 Hz SP8 8th preset speed See page 57. 0 to 500 Hz 40 Hz SP9 9th preset speed See page 57. 0 to 500 Hz 45 Hz SP10 10th preset speed See page 57. 0 to 500 Hz 50 Hz SP11 11th preset speed See page 57. 0 to 500 Hz 55 HZ SP12 12th preset speed See page 57. 0 to 500 Hz 60 Hz SP13 13th preset speed See page 57. 0 to 500 Hz 70 Hz SP14 14th preset speed See page 57. 0 to 500 Hz 80 Hz SP15 15th preset speed See page 57. 0 to 500 Hz 90 Hz SP16 16th preset speed See page 57. 0 to 500 Hz 100 Hz CLI Current limit 0.25 to 1.5 In1 1.5 In Used to limit the torque and the temperature rise of the motor. CL2 2nd current limit See page 71. 0.25 to 1.5 In 1.5 In tLS Low speed operating time 0 to 999.9 s 0 (no time limit) After operation at LSP for a defined period, a motor stop is requested automatically. The motor restarts if the frequency reference is greater than LSP and if a run command is still present. rSL Restart error threshold (wake-up threshold) See page 67. 0 to 100% 0 UFr2 IR compensation, motor 2 See page 73. 0 to 100% 20 FLG2 Frequency loop gain, motor 2 See page 73. 1 to 100% 20 StA2 Stability, motor 2 See page 73. 1 to 100% 20 SLP2 Slip compensation, motor 2 See page 73. 0 to 150% 100% 1 In is the nominal drive controller current indicated on the drive controller nameplate. SEt- These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. To facilitate programming, they can also be accessed and adjusted from the menu where the corresponding function is found. A detailed description of these functions can be found on the indicated pages.
  • 27. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus 06/2004 Drive Control Menu drC- © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 27 DRIVE CONTROL MENU drC- With the exception of tUn, drive control parameters can only be modified when the drive controller is stopped and no run command is present. This menu can be accessed with the access locking switch on the remote keypad display in the position. Drive controller performance can be optimized by: • Setting the drive control parameters to the values on the motor nameplate • Performing an auto-tune operation (on a standard asynchronous motor) Code Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting Ftd Motor frequency threshold above which the relay contact (R1 or R2) closes, or output AOV = 10 V. R1, R2, or dO must be assigned to FtA. 0 to 500 Hz bFr ttd Motor thermal state threshold above which the relay contact (R1 or R2) closes, or output AOV = 10 V. R1, R2, or dO must be assigned to tSA. 0 to 118% 100% Ctd Motor current threshold beyond which the relay contact (R1 or R2) closes, or output AOV = 10 V. R1, R2, or dO must be assigned to CtA. 0 to 1.5 In1 In1 SdS Scale factor for display parameter SPd1/SPd2/SPd3 (see SUP- menu on page 83) 0.1 to 200 30 Used to scale a value (such as motor speed) in proportion to the output frequency rFr. If SdS ≤ 1, SPd1 is displayed (possible definition = 0.01). If 1 < SdS ≤ 10, SPd2 is displayed (possible definition = 0.1). If SdS > 10, SPd3 is displayed (possible definition = 1). If SdS > 10 and SdS x rFr > 9999: Display of Spd3 = (to 2 decimal places). For example, if SdS x rFr equals 24,223, the display shows 24.22. If SdS > 10 and SdS x rFr > 65535, the display shows 65.54. Example: Display motor speed for a 4-pole motor, 1500 rpm at 50 Hz (synchronous speed): SdS = 30 SPd3 = 1500 at rFr = 50 Hz SFr Switching frequency See page 30. 2.0 to 16 kHz 4 kHz This parameter can also be accessed in the drC- menu. 1 In is the nominal drive controller current indicated on the drive controller nameplate. SEt- SdS x rFr 1000 ESC ENT bFr ENT ESC ENTESC FCS ESC ESC drC- tAI Standard motor frequency Return to factory settings/restore configuration
  • 28. Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04 Drive Control Menu drC- 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved28 Code Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting bFr Motor frequency 50 or 60 Hz 50 This parameter modifies the presets of the following parameters: HSP (page 24), Ftd (page 27), FrS (page 28), and tFr (page 30). UnS Nominal motor voltage indicated on the nameplate Varies with drive controller rating Varies with drive controller rating ATV31•••M2: 100 to 240 V ATV31•••M3X: 100 to 240 V ATV31•••N4: 100 to 500 V ATV31•••S6X: 100 to 600 V FrS Nominal motor frequency indicated on the nameplate 10 to 500 Hz 50 Hz The ratio must not exceed the following values: ATV31•••M2: 7 ATV31•••M3X: 7 ATV31•••N4: 14 ATV31•••S6X: 17 NOTE: Changing the setting of bFr to 60 Hz also changes the setting of FrS to 60 Hz. nCr Nominal motor current indicated on the nameplate 0.25 to 1.5 In1 Varies with drive controller rating nSP Nominal motor speed indicated on the nameplate 0 to 32760 rpm Varies with drive controller rating 0 to 9999 rpm, then 10.00 to 32.76 krpm If the nameplate indicates synchronous speed and slip (in Hz or as a percentage) instead of nominal speed, calculate nominal speed as follows: Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x or Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x (50 Hz motors) or Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x (60 Hz motors) COS Motor power factor indicated on the nameplate 0.5 to 1 Varies with drive controller rating 1 In is the nominal drive controller current indicated on the drive controller nameplate. drC- UnS (in volts) FrS (in Hz) 100 - slip as a% 100 50 - slip in Hz 50 60 - slip in Hz 60
  • 29. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus 06/2004 Drive Control Menu drC- © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 29 Code Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting rSC Cold state stator resistance See below. nO nO: Function inactive. For applications that do not require high performance or do not tolerate automatic auto-tuning (passing a current through the motor) each time the drive is powered up. InIt: Activates the function. Used to improve low-speed performance, whatever the thermal state of the motor. XXXX: Value of cold state stator resistance used, in mΩ. NOTE: We recommended that you activate this function for lifting and handling applications. This function should only be activated when the motor is cold. When rSC = InIt, parameter tUn is forced to POn. At the next run command, the stator resistance is measured with an auto-tune. The value of parameter rSC then changes to this measured stator resistance value (XXXX) and is maintained at that value; tUn remains forced to POn. Parameter rSC remains at InIt as long as the stator resistance measurement has not been performed. Value XXXX can be forced or modified using the keys. tUn Motor control auto-tuning See below. nO Before performing an auto-tune, ensure that all the drive control parameters (UnS, FrS, nCr, nSP, COS) are configured correctly. Parameter tUn can be modified with the drive controller running; however, an auto-tune will only be performed if no run or braking command is present. nO: Auto-tuning is not performed. YES: Auto-tuning is performed as soon as possible, then the parameter automatically switches to dOnE or, in the event of a fault, to nO. The tnF fault is displayed if tnL = YES (see page 79). dOnE: Auto-tuning is completed and the measured stator resistance will be used to control the motor. rUn: Auto-tuning is performed each time a run command is sent. POn: Auto-tuning is performed each time the controller is powered up. LI1 to LI6: Auto-tuning is performed when the logic input assigned to this function transitions from 0 to 1. Note: tUn is forced to POn if rSC is any value other than nO. Auto-tuning will only be performed if no run or braking command is present. If a freewheel stop or fast stop function is assigned to a logic input, this input must be set to 1 (active at 0). Auto-tuning may last for 1 to 2 seconds. Wait for the display to change to dOnE or nO. Interrupting auto-tuning may result in an auto-tuning fault (see page 86) and cause the motor to be improperly tuned. During auto-tuning, the motor operates at nominal current. tUS Auto-tuning status (status information only, cannot be modified) See below. tAb tAb: The default stator resistance value is used to control the motor. PEnd: Auto-tuning has been requested but not yet performed. PrOG: Auto-tuning is in progress. FAIL: Auto-tuning has failed. dOnE: Auto-tuning is complete. The stator resistance measured by the auto-tuning function is used to control the motor. Strd: Auto-tuning is complete. The cold state stator resistance is used to control the motor (rSC must be other than nO). UFt Selection of the voltage/frequency ratio See below. n L: Constant torque (for motors connected in parallel or special motors) P: Variable torque (pump and fan applications) n: Sensorless flux vector control (for constant torque applications) nLd: Energy savings (for variable torque applications not requiring high dynamics. This behaves in a similar way to the P ratio at no load and the n ratio with load.) drC- L UnS FrS n P Voltage Frequency
  • 30. Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04 Drive Control Menu drC- 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved30 Code Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting nrd Random switching frequency See below. YES This function randomly modulates the switching frequency to reduce motor noise. YES: Frequency with random modulation nO: Fixed frequency SFr Switching frequency1 2.0 to 16 kHz 4 kHz Adjust this setting to reduce audible motor noise. If the switching frequency is set to a value higher than 4 kHz, in the event of excessive temperature rise, the drive controller automatically reduces the switching frequency. It increases it again when the temperature returns to normal. If switching frequency is set above the factory setting (4 kHz), refer to the ATV31 Installation Manual for derating curves. tFr Maximum output frequency 10 to 500 Hz 60 Hz The factory setting is 60 Hz, or 72 Hz if bFr is set to 60 Hz. SSL Suppression of the speed loop filter See below. nO nO: The speed loop filter is active (prevents the reference from being exceeded). YES: The speed loop filter is suppressed. In position control applications, this setting reduces the response time, but the reference may be exceeded. SCS Saving the configuration2 See below. nO nO: Function inactive StrI: Saves the current configuration (but not the result of auto-tuning) to EEPROM. SCS automatically switches to nO as soon as the save is performed. Use this function to keep another configuration in reserve, in addition to the current configuration. The drive controller is factory set with the current configuration and the backup configuration both initialized to the factory configuration. If the remote keypad display is connected to the drive controller, up to four additional settings are available: FIL1, FIL2, FIL3, and FIL4. Use these selections to save up to four configurations in the remote keypad display’s EEPROM memory. SCS automatically switches to nO as soon as the save is performed. FCS Return to factory settings/Restore configuration2 See below. nO nO: Function inactive rECI: Replaces the current configuration with the backup configuration previously saved by SCS (SCS set to Strl). rECI is visible only if the backup configuration has been saved. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action is performed. InI: Replaces the current configuration with the factory settings. FCS automatically switches to nO as soon as this action is performed. If the remote keypad display is connected to the drive controller, up to four additional selections are available corresponding to backup files loaded in the remote keypad display's EEPROM memory: FIL1, FIL2, FIL3, and FIL4. These selections replace the current configuration with the corresponding backup configuration in the remote keypad display. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action is performed. Note: If nAd briefly appears on the display once the parameter has switched to nO, the configuration transfer is not possible and has not been performed (because the controller ratings are different, for example). If ntr briefly appears on the display once the parameter has switched to nO, a configuration transfer error has occurred and the factory settings must be restored using InI. In both cases, check the configuration to be transferred before trying again. NOTE: For rECI, InI, and FIL1 to FIL4 to take effect, you must press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s. 1 This parameter can also be accessed in the Settings menu, SEt-. See page 23. 2 SCS and FCS can be accessed in several configuration menus, but their settings affect all menus and parameters as a whole. drC- 0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 -10 10 20 30 40 0 50 0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 -10 10 20 30 40 0 50 t Hz t Hz SSL = nO SSL = YES
  • 31. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus 06/2004 I/O Menu I-O- © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 31 I/O MENU I-O- I/O parameters can only be modified when the drive controller is stopped and no run command is present. This menu can be accessed with the access locking switch on the remote keypad display in the position. ESC ENT tCC ENT ESC ENTESC FCS ESC ESC I-O- Return to factory settings/restore configuration Code Description Factory Setting tCC Type of control: 2-wire, 3-wire, or local 2C ATV31••••••A: LOC Control configuration: 2C = 2-wire control 3C = 3-wire control LOC = Local control, for ATV31••••••A controllers only. This option is not available if parameter LAC = L3 (see page 44). 2-wire control (maintained contact): The state of the input (open or closed) controls running or stopping. Wiring example: LI1: forward LIx: reverse 3-wire control (pulse control): A forward or reverse pulse is sufficient to control startup. A stop pulse is sufficient to control stopping. Wiring example: LI1: stop LI2: forward LIx: reverse NOTE: To change the assignment of tCC, press the ENT key for 2 s. This causes the following functions to return to their factory setting: rrS, tCt, and all functions affecting logic inputs. tCt Type of 2-wire control (parameter only accessible if tCC = 2C) trn LEL: If the forward or reverse input is high when the drive controller is powered up, the drive controller will start the motor. If both inputs are high on power up, the drive controller will run forward. trn: The forward or reverse input must transition from low to high before the drive controller will start the motor. If the forward or reverse input is high when the drive controller is powered up, the input must be cycled before the drive controller will start the motor. PFO: Same as LEL, but the forward input has priority over the reverse input. If forward is activated while the controller is running in reverse, the drive controller will run in the forward direction. rrS Reverse operation via logic input if tCC = 2C: LI2 if tCC = 3C: LI3 if tCC = LOC: nO If rrS = nO, reverse operation is not assigned to a logic input. Reverse operation may still be commanded by another means, such as negative voltage on AI2, a serial link command, or the remote keypad. nO: Not assigned LI2: Logic input LI2, can be accessed if tCC = 2C LI5: Logic input LI5 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI6: Logic input LI6 LI4: Logic input LI4 I-O- 24 V LI1 LIx ATV31 Controller 24 V LI1 LI2 LIx ATV31 Controller 2-wire/3-wire control
  • 32. Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04 I/O Menu I-O- 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved32 Code Description Factory Setting CrL3 CrH3 Value for low speed (LSP) on input AI3, can be set between 0 and 20 mA Value for high speed (HSP) on input AI3, can be set between 4 and 20 mA 4 mA 20 mA These two parameters are used to configure the input for 0–20 mA, 4–20 mA, 20–4 mA, etc. AO1t Configuration of the analog output 0A 0A: 0–20 mA configuration (use terminal AOC) 4A: 4–20 mA configuration (use terminal AOC) 10U: 0–10 V configuration (use terminal AOV) dO Analog/logic output AOC/AOV nO nO: Not assigned OCr: Motor current. 20 mA or 10 V corresponds to twice the nominal drive controller current. rFr: Motor frequency. 20 mA or 10 V corresponds to the maximum frequency tFr (page 30). Otr: Motor torque. 20 mA or 10 V corresponds to twice the nominal motor torque. OPr: Power supplied by the drive. 20 mA or 10 V corresponds to twice the nominal drive controller power. Making the following assignments changes the analog output to a logic output (refer to the ATV31 Installation Manual for more information). With these assignments, configure AOt to 0 A. FLt: Drive fault rUn: Drive running FtA: Frequency threshold reached (Ftd parameter in the SEt- menu, page 27) FLA: High speed (HSP) reached CtA: Current threshold reached (Ctd parameter in the SEt- menu, page 27) SrA: Frequency reference reached tSA: Motor thermal threshold reached (ttd parameter in the SEt- menu, page 27) bLC: Brake sequence (status information only. bLC can be only be activated or deactivated from the FUn- menu, see page 70). APL: Loss of 4–20 mA signal, even if LFL = nO (page 79) The logic output state is 1 (24 V) when the selected assignment is active, except for FLt which is in state 1 if the drive controller is not faulted. r1 Relay R1 FLt nO: Not assigned FLt: Drive fault rUn: Drive running FtA: Frequency threshold reached (Ftd parameter in the SEt- menu, page 27) FLA: High speed (HSP) reached CtA: Current threshold reached (Ctd parameter in the SEt- menu, page 27) SrA: Frequency reference reached tSA: Motor thermal threshold reached (ttd parameter in the SEt- menu, page 27) APL: Loss of 4–20 mA signal, even if LFL = nO (page 79) The relay is powered up when the selected assignment is active, except for FLt which is powered up if the drive controller is not faulted. r2 Relay R2 nO nO: Not assigned FLt: Drive fault rUn: Drive running FtA: Frequency threshold reached (Ftd parameter in the SEt- menu, page 27) FLA: High speed (HSP) reached CtA: Current threshold reached (Ctd parameter in the SEt- menu, page 27) SrA: Frequency reference reached tSA: Motor thermal threshold reached (ttd parameter in the SEt- menu, page 27) bLC: Brake sequence (status information only. bLC can be only be activated or deactivated from the FUn- menu, see page 70). APL: Loss of 4–20 mA signal, even if LFL = nO (page 79) The relay is powered up when the selected assignment is active, except for FLt which is powered up if the drive controller is not faulted. I-O- AI 3 (mA) 0 LSP HSP CrL3 CrH3 20 AI 3 (mA) 0 LSP HSP CrL3CrH3 (20 mA)(4 mA) Frequency Frequency Example: 20–4 mA
  • 33. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus 06/2004 I/O Menu I-O- © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 33 Code Description Factory Setting SCS Saving the configuration1 nO nO: Function inactive StrI: Saves the current configuration (but not the result of auto-tuning) to EEPROM. SCS automatically switches to nO as soon as the save is performed. Use this function to keep another configuration in reserve, in addition to the current configuration. The drive controller is factory set with the current configuration and the backup configuration both initialized to the factory configuration. If the remote keypad display is connected to the drive controller, up to four additional settings are available: FIL1, FIL2, FIL3, and FIL4. Use these selections to save up to four configurations in the remote keypad display’s EEPROM memory. SCS automatically switches to nO as soon as the save is performed. FCS Return to factory settings/restore configuration1 nO nO: Function inactive rECI: Replaces the current configuration with the backup configuration previously saved by SCS (SCS set to Strl). rECI is visible only if the backup configuration has been saved. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action is performed. InI: Replaces the current configuration with the factory settings. FCS automatically switches to nO as soon as this action is performed. If the remote keypad display is connected to the drive controller, up to four additional selections are available corresponding to backup files loaded in the remote keypad display's EEPROM memory: FIL1, FIL2, FIL3, and FIL4. These selections replace the current configuration with the corresponding backup configuration in the remote keypad display. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action is performed. Note: If nAd briefly appears on the display once the parameter has switched to nO, the configuration transfer is not possible and has not been performed (because the controller ratings are different, for example). If ntr briefly appears on the display once the parameter has switched to nO, a configuration transfer error has occurred and the factory settings must be restored using InI. In both cases, check the configuration to be transferred before trying again. NOTE: For rECI, InI, and FIL1 to FIL4 to take effect, you must press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s. 1 SCS and FCS can be accessed in several configuration menus, but their settings affect all menus and parameters as a whole. I-O-
  • 34. Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04 Control Menu CtL- 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved34 CONTROL MENU CTL- Control parameters can only be modified when the drive controller is stopped and no run command is present. This menu can be accessed with the access locking switch on the remote keypad display in the position. Control Channels Control commands, such as forward and reverse, and speed reference commands can be sent to the drive controller from the sources specified in Table 6. ATV31 drive controllers allow you to assign control and reference sources to separate control channels (Fr1, Fr2, Cd1, or Cd2, see pages 44–45) and to switch between them. For example, you might assign LCC to reference channel 1 and CAn to reference channel 2 and switch between the two reference sources. It is also possible to use separate sources for control and reference commands. This is called mixed mode operation. These functions are explained in detail in the sections beginning on page 36. ESC ENT LAC ENT ESC ENTESC FCS ESC ESC CtL- Fr1 Return to factory settings/restore configuration Table 6: Control and Reference Sources Control Sources (CMD) Reference Sources (rFr) tEr: Terminal (LI) AI1, AI2, AI3: Terminal LOC: Drive keypad (RUN/STOP) on ATV31••••••A controllers only AIP: Potentiometer on ATV31••••••A only LCC: Remote keypad display (RJ45 socket) LCC: Drive keypad (on ATV31•••••• and ATV31••••••A controllers) or remote keypad display Mdb: Modbus (RJ45 socket) Mdb: Modbus (RJ45 socket) CAn: CANopen (RJ45 socket) CAn: CANopen (RJ45 socket) WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION The stop buttons on ATV31••••••A drive controllers and on the remote keypad display can be programmed to not have priority. To retain stop key priority, set PSt to YES (see page 47). Failure to follow this instruction can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage. Function access level
  • 35. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus 06/2004 Control Menu CtL- © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 35 Parameter LAC Use parameter LAC (page 44) in the CtL- menu to select levels of function access and to set the control and reference sources. 1. LAC = L1: Level 1—access to standard functions. Control and reference commands come from one source. See “Parameter LAC = L1 or L2” on page 36. 2. LAC = L2: Level 2—access to all of the level 1 functions, plus the advanced functions listed below. Control and reference commands come from one source. See “Parameter LAC = L1 or L2” on page 36. — +/- Speed (motorized potentiometer) — Brake control — Switching for 2nd current limit — Motor switching — Management of limit switches 3. LAC = L3: Level 3—access to all of the level 2 functions. Control and reference commands can come from separate sources. See “Parameter LAC = L3” on page 37.
  • 36. Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04 Control Menu CtL- 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved36 Parameter LAC = L1 or L2 If parameter LAC is set to L1 or L2, the control and reference commands come from one source. The possible control and reference sources, and the settings that specify them, are: • Control and reference via the input terminals or the drive keypad display in forced local (see FLO on page 80) • Control and reference via the Modbus serial link • Control and reference via the CANopen serial link • Control and reference via the remote keypad display (see LCC on page 46) NOTE: Modbus or CANopen is selected online by writing the appropriate control word (refer to the protocol-specific documentation). The diagram below illustrates the order of priority when more than one control and reference source is specified. In the diagram, information flows from left to right. At step 1, LCC is not set to YES to enable the remote keypad display, so the drive keypad display is selected as the control and reference source. At steps 2–4, Modbus, CANopen, and forced local control are not set to YES, so the drive keypad display remains the selected source. The order of priority, therefore, is forced local, CANopen, Modbus, and the drive keypad display or the remote keypad display. For example, if forced local mode were enabled, it would have priority over any other setting. Similarly, if CANopen were enabled, it would have priority over any other setting except for FLO. Refer to the diagrams on pages 39 and 40 for more detail. • On ATV31•••••• drive controllers with the factory configuration, control and reference commands come from the control terminals. • On ATV31••••••A drive controllers with the factory configuration, control commands come from the drive keypad display and reference commands come from a summation of the reference potentiometer and AI1 on the control terminals. • With a remote keypad display, if LCC = YES (see page 46), control and reference commands come from the remote keypad display. The reference frequency is set by parameter LFr in the SEt- menu (see page 24). A B C A B C A C Legend: Modbus CANopen FLO LCC 1 2 3 4 The drive keypad display is selected as the control and reference source. Remote Keypad Display Forced Local Mode
  • 37. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus 06/2004 Control Menu CtL- © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 37 Parameter LAC = L3 If parameter LAC is set to L3: • The control and reference channels can be combined (parameter CHCF = SIM, see page 45), or • The control and reference channels can be separate (parameter CHCF = SEP, see page 45) Parameter CHCF = SIM The following figure illustrates combined control and reference sources: Use parameter rFC (page 45) to select reference channel Fr1 or Fr2, or to configure a logic input or a control word bit for remote switching between the two channels. Refer to the diagram on page 42. rFC Selection of reference channel 1 (Fr1, page 44) The control commands are from the same source. Selection of reference channel 2 (Fr2, page 44) The control commands are from the same source. Control and reference from Fr1
  • 38. Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04 Control Menu CtL- 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved38 Parameter CHCF = SEP The following figures illustrate separate control and reference channels (parameter CHCF = SEP). Separate Reference Channels: Use parameter rFC (page 45) to select reference channel Fr1 or Fr2, or to configure a logic input or a control word bit for remote switching between the two channels. Separate Control Channels: Use parameter CCS (page 46) to select control channel Cd1 or Cd2, or to configure a logic input or a control word bit for remote switching between the two channels. rFC Selection of reference channel 1 (Fr1, page 44) Selection of reference channel 2 (Fr2, page 44) Reference from Fr1 CCS Selection of control channel 1 (Cd1, page 45). Selection of control channel 2 (Cd2, page 45) Control from Cd1
  • 39. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus 06/2004 Control Menu CtL- © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 39 Reference Channel for LAC = L1 or L2 nO SA2 AI1 AI2 AI3 AIP (SP1) SP2 SP16 nO nO rFC LI LCC FLO Modbus CANopen HSP FrH rFr LSP SA3 AI1 AI2 AI3 AIP nO nO nO nO nO YES AI1 AI2 AI3 UPdt Fr1 UPdH AI1 AI2 AI3 AIP UPdt Fr2 UPdH nO B A AI1 AI2 AI3 AIP ACC DEC AC2 DE2 PIF PIF LFr LI A B C A XXX nO SA2 AI1 AI2 AI3 AIP (SP1) SP2 SP16 nO nO rFC LI LCC FLO Modbus CANopen HSP FrH rFr LSP SA3 AI1 AI2 AI3 AIP nO nO nO nO nO YES AI1 AI2 AI3 UPdt Fr1 UPdH AI1 AI2 AI3 AIP UPdt Fr2 UPdH nO B A AI1 AI2 AI3 AIP ACC DEC AC2 DE2 PIF PIF LFr LI A B C A XXX Preset speeds PI function (see page 62) Jog operation PI not assigned PI assigned Channel1Channel2 Remote keypad display Forced local mode Ramps The black square represents the factory setting of parameter xxx. Function accessible if LAC = L2 Modbus or CANopen is selected online by writing the appropriate control word (see the protocol-specific documentation). Note: If the +/- speed command is configured (Fr1 = UPdt or UPdH), summing inputs SA2/SA3 are not active. Legend: + speed - speed + speed - speed
  • 40. Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04 Control Menu CtL- 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved40 Control Channel for LAC = L1 or L2 The settings of parameters FLO, LCC, and the selection of Modbus or CANopen protocol determine both the reference and control channels. The order of priority is FLO, CANopen, Modbus, and LCC. LI LI LI LCC CANopen Modbus LOC RUN STOP RUN STOP FWD / REV STOP STOP 3C 2C YES nO tCC FLO PSt YES nO nO CMD A B C A XXX (STOP priority) Remote keypad display Remote keypad display ATV31••••••A drive keypad ATV31••••••A drive keypad Forward Reverse STOP Legend: The black square represents the factory setting of parameter xxx.
  • 41. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus 06/2004 Control Menu CtL- © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 41 Reference Channel for LAC = L3 (SP1) SP2 SP16 nO nO rFC LI FLO HSP FrH rFr LSP SA3 AI1 AI2 AI3 AIP nO nO nO nO AI1 AI2 AI3 B A UPdt Fr1 UPdH AI1 AI2 AI3 AIP UPdt Fr2 UPdH nO AI1 AI2 AI3 Mdb LCC AIP CAn ACC DEC AC2 DE2 PIF LI Mdb CAn PIF Mdb LCC CAn Mdb LCC CAn nO SA2 AI1 AI2 AI3 AIP LFr LFr LFr LFr LFr Mdb LCC CAn FLOC AI1 AI2 AI3 AIP LCC LI A B C A XXX Preset speeds PI function (see page 62) Jog operation PI not assigned Remote keypad display Forced local mode Ramps PI assigned Remote keypad display Legend: Channel1Channel2 Note: If the +/- speed command is configured (Fr1 = UPdt or UPdH), summing inputs SA2/SA3 are not active. Remote keypad display Remote keypad display Remote keypad display + speed - speed The black square represents the factory setting of parameter xxx. + speed - speed
  • 42. Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04 Control Menu CtL- 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved42 Control Channel for LAC = L3: CHCF = SIM, Combined Reference and Control If CHCF is set to SIM (see page 45), parameters Fr1, Fr2, FLO, and FLOC determine both the reference and control source. For example, if the reference is via the analog input on the terminal block, control is via the logic input on the terminal block. UPdt Fr1 UPdH AI1 AI2 AI3 AIP LI LI Mdb LCC CAn rFC SEP FLO SIM nO LI PSt YES nO FLOC AI1 AI2 AI3 AIP CHCF LCC UPdt Fr2 UPdH nO AI1 AI2 AI3 AIP LI Mdb LCC CAn CMD RUN STOP RUN / STOP FWD / REV RUN STOP RUN / STOP FWD / REV (RUN / STOP) (RUN / STOP FWD / REV STOP STOP A B C A XXX The black square represents the factory setting of parameter xxx. Legend: (STOP has priority) Forced local mode Remote keypad display Remote keypad display Remote keypad display Remote keypad display ATV31•••A drive keypad ATV31•••A drive keypad ATV31•••A drive keypad ATV31•••A drive keypad
  • 43. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus 06/2004 Control Menu CtL- © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 43 Control Channel for LAC = L3: CHCF = SEP, Mixed Mode (Separate Reference and Control) Parameters FLO and FLOC are common to reference and control. For example, if the reference in forced local mode is via the analog input on the terminal block, control in forced local mode is via the logic input on the terminal block. tEr Cd1 LOC LCC LI LI Mdb RUN STOP RUN / STOP FWD / REV (RUN / STOP) (RUN / STOP FWD / REV) STOP STOP RUN STOP RUN / STOP FWD / REV CAn CCS SEP LI FLO SIM nO PSt YES nO LI FLOC AI1 AI2 AI3 AIP CHCF LCC tEr Cd2 LOC LI Mdb LCC CAn CMD A B C A XXX (STOP has priority) Forced local mode The black square represents the factory setting of parameter xxx. Forward Reverse STOP Remote keypad display ATV31•••A drive keypad Legend: Remote keypad display ATV31•••A drive keypad Remote keypad display ATV31•••A drive keypad Remote keypad display ATV31•••A drive keypad
  • 44. Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04 Control Menu CtL- 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved44 Refer to the function compatibility table on page 19. It is not possible to configure incompatible control functions. The first function configured will prevent any functions that are incompatible with it from being configured. Code Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting LAC Function access level See below. L1 L1: Level 1—access to standard functions. L2: Level 2—access to the level 1 functions plus the following advanced functions in the FUn- menu: • +/- speed • Brake control • Switching for second current limit • Motor switching • Management of limit switches L3: Level 3—access to all of the level 2 functions plus mixed mode operation. Assigning L3 to LAC restores parameters Fr1 (below), Cd1 (page 45), CHCF (page 45), and tCC (page 31) to their factory settings (on ATV31••••••A drive controllers, tCC is reset to 2C). If LAC is set to L3, you must restore the factory setting with parameter FCS (page 47) to set LAC back to L1 or to change it to L2. If LAC is set to L2, you must restore the factory setting with parameter FCS to set LAC back to L1. If LAC is set to L2, you can change LAC to L3 without using parameter FCS. NOTE: In order to change the assignment of LAC, you must press and hold down the ENT key for 2 seconds. Fr1 Configuration of reference 1 See below. AI1 AIP for ATV31••••••A AI1: Analog input AI1 AI2: Analog input AI2 AI3: Analog input AI3 AIP: Potentiometer (ATV31••••••A) If LAC = L2 or L3, the following additional assignments are possible: UPdt: + speed/- speed via LI1 UpdH: + speed/- speed via on the drive keypad display (ATV31 or ATV31••••••A) or on the remote keypad display. For operation, display the frequency rFr (see page 83).1 If LAC = L3, the following additional assignments are possible: LCC: Reference via the remote keypad display, LFr parameter in the SEt- menu page 24. Ndb: Reference via Modbus CAn: Reference via CANopen Fr2 Configuration of reference 2 See below. nO nO: Not assigned AI1: Analog input AI1 AI2: Analog input AI2 AI3: Analog input AI3 AIP: Potentiometer (ATV31••••••A only) If LAC = L2 or L3, the following additional assignments are possible: UPdt: + speed/- speed via LI1 UpdH:+ speed/- speed via on the drive keypad display (ATV31 or ATV31••••••A) or on the remote keypad display. For operation, display the frequency rFr (see page 83).1 If LAC = L3, the following additional assignments are possible: LCC: Reference via the remote keypad display, LFr parameter in the SEt- menu page 24. Ndb: Reference via Modbus CAn: Reference via CANopen 1 Only one of the UPdt/UPdH assignments is permitted on each reference channel. CtL- r r r r
  • 45. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus 06/2004 Control Menu CtL- © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 45 Code Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting rFC Reference switching See below. Fr1 Use parameter rFC to select channel Fr1 or Fr2, or to configure a logic input or a control bit for remote switching of Fr1 or Fr2. Fr1: Reference = Reference 1 Fr2: Reference = Reference 2 LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following additional assignments are possible: C111: Bit 11 of the Modbus control word C112: Bit 12 of the Modbus control word C113: Bit 13 of the Modbus control word C114: Bit 14 of the Modbus control word C115: Bit 15 of the Modbus control word C211: Bit 11 of the CANopen control word C212: Bit 12 of the CANopen control word C213: Bit 13 of the CANopen control word C214: Bit 14 of the CANopen control word C215: Bit 15 of the CANopen control word The reference can be switched with the drive controller running. Fr1 is active when the logic input or control word bit is in state 0. Fr2 is active when the logic input or control word bit is in state 1. CHCF Mixed mode (separate control and reference channels) See below. SIM CHCF can be accessed if LAC = L3. SIN: Combined control and reference channels SEP: Separate control and reference channels Cd1 Configuration of control channel 1 See below. tEr LOC for ATV31••••••A Cd1 can be accessed if CHCF = SEP and LAC = L3. tEr: Terminal block control LOC: Drive keypad display control (ATV31••••••A only) LCC: Remote keypad display control Ndb: Control via Modbus CAn: Control via CANopen Cd2 Configuration of control channel 2 See below. Mdb: Cd2 can be accessed if CHCF = SEP and LAC = L3. tEr: Terminal block control LOC: Drive keypad display control (ATV31••••••A only) LCC: Remote keypad display control Ndb: Control via Modbus CAn: Control via CANopen CtL- These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
  • 46. Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04 Control Menu CtL- 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved46 Code Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting CCS Control channel switching See below. Cd1 CCS can be accessed if CHCF = SEP and LAC = L3. Use parameter CCS to select channel Cd1 or Cd2, or to configure a logic input or a control bit for remote switching of Cd1 or Cd2. Cd1: Control channel = Channel 1 Cd2: Control channel = Channel 2 LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 C111: Bit 11 of the Modbus control word C112: Bit 12 of the Modbus control word C113: Bit 13 of the Modbus control word C114: Bit 14 of the Modbus control word C115: Bit 15 of the Modbus control word C211: Bit 11 of the CANopen control word C212: Bit 12 of the CANopen control word C213: Bit 13 of the CANopen control word C214: Bit 14 of the CANopen control word C215: Bit 15 of the CANopen control word Channel 1 is active when the input or control word bit is in state 0. Channel 2 is active when the input or control word bit is in state 1. COp Copy channel 1 to channel 2. (The copy is possible only in this direction.) See below. nO COP can be accessed if LAC = L3. nO: No copy SP: Copy reference Cd: Copy control ALL: Copy control and reference If channel 2 is controlled via the terminal block, channel 1 control is not copied. If channel 2 reference is set via AI1, AI2, AI3, or AIP, channel 1 reference is not copied. The reference copied is FrH (before the ramp) unless the channel 2 reference is set via +/- speed. In this case, the reference copied is rFr (after ramp). NOTE: Copying the control and/or the reference may change the direction of rotation. LCC Control via the remote keypad display See below. nO LCC can only be accessed if the drive controller is equipped with a remote keypad display, and if LAC = L1 or L2. nO: Function inactive YES: Enables control of the drive controller with the STOP/RESET, RUN, and FWD/REV buttons on the remote keypad display. The speed reference is given by parameter LFr in the SEt- menu. Only the freewheel, fast stop, and DC injection stop commands remain active on the terminal block. If the remote keypad display is not connected, the drive controller will lock on an SLF fault. CtL- These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
  • 47. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus 06/2004 Control Menu CtL- © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 47 Code Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting PSt Stop priority See below. YES PSt gives priority to the STOP key on the drive keypad display (ATV31••••••A only) or on the remote keypad display, regardless of the control channel selected (terminal block or communication bus). If set to nO, the active control channel has priority. If the active control channel is the local or remote keypad display, the stop button retains priority, regardless of the setting of PSt. NOTE: To change the assignment of PSt, you must press and hold down the ENT key for 2 seconds nO: Function inactive YES: STOP key priority rOt Direction of operation See below. dFr Direction of operation allowed for the RUN key on the drive keypad display (ATV31••••••A only). dFr: Forward drS: Reverse bOt: On ATV31•••••• drive controllers, both directions are authorized; on ATV31••••••A controllers, only the forward direction is possible. SCS Saving the configuration1 See below. See below. nO: Function inactive StrI: Saves the current configuration (but not the result of auto-tuning) to EEPROM. SCS automatically switches to nO as soon as the save is performed. Use this function to keep another configuration in reserve, in addition to the current configuration. The drive controller is factory set with the current configuration and the backup configuration both initialized to the factory configuration. If the remote keypad display is connected to the drive controller, up to four additional settings are available: FIL1, FIL2, FIL3, and FIL4. Use these selections to save up to four configurations in the remote keypad display’s EEPROM memory. SCS automatically switches to nO as soon as the save is performed. FCS Return to factory settings/Restore configuration1 See below. See below. nO: Function inactive rECI: Replaces the current configuration with the backup configuration previously saved by SCS (SCS set to Strl). rECI is visible only if the backup configuration has been saved. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action is performed. InI: Replaces the current configuration with the factory settings. FCS automatically switches to nO as soon as this action is performed. If the remote keypad display is connected to the drive controller, up to four additional selections are available corresponding to backup files loaded in the remote keypad display's EEPROM memory: FIL1, FIL2, FIL3, and FIL4. These selections replace the current configuration with the corresponding backup configuration in the remote keypad display. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action is performed. Note: If nAd briefly appears on the display once the parameter has switched to nO, the configuration transfer is not possible and has not been performed (because the controller ratings are different, for example). If ntr briefly appears on the display once the parameter has switched to nO, a configuration transfer error has occurred and the factory settings must be restored using InI. In both cases, check the configuration to be transferred before trying again. NOTE: For rECI, InI, and FIL1 to FIL4 to take effect, you must press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s. 1 SCS and FCS can be accessed in several configuration menus, but their settings affect all menus and parameters as a whole. CtL- WARNING DISABLED STOP COMMAND Disabling the stop key on the drive keypad display or the remote keypad display will prevent the drive controller from stopping when the stop key is pressed. An external stop command must be installed to stop the motor. Failure to follow this instruction can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
  • 48. Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04 Application Functions Menu FUn- 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved48 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MENU FUN- Application function parameters can only be modified when the drive controller is stopped and with no run command present. On the remote keypad display, this menu can be accessed with the access locking switch in the position. Some functions in this menu have numerous parameters. To simplify programming and to minimize scrolling, these functions are grouped into sub-menus. Like menus, sub-menus are identified by a dash. For example, LIA- is a sub-menu, but LIn is a parameter. It is not possible to configure incompatible application functions. The first function configured will prevent any functions that are incompatible with it from being configured. Refer to the function compatibility table on page 19. ENT ESC rPC- ENT ENT ESC ENT ESCESC FCS ESC ENT ESC ENT ESC SA1- ESC FUn- Sub-menu Sub-menu
  • 49. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus 06/2004 Application Functions Menu FUn- © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 49 Sub-menu Parameter Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting rPC- Ramp adjustment rPt Ramp type Defines the shape of the acceleration and deceleration ramps. LIn LIn: Linear S: S ramp U: U ramp CUS: Customized S ramps The curve coefficient is fixed, with t2 = 0.6 x t1 with t1 = set ramp time. The curve coefficient is fixed, with t2 = 0.5 x t1 with t1 = set ramp time. tA1: Can be set between 0 and 100% (of ACC or AC2) tA2: Can be set between 0 and (100% - tA1) (of ACC or AC2) tA3: Can be set between 0 and 100% (of dEC or dE2) tA4: Can be set between 0 and (100% - tA3) (of dEC or dE2) tA1 Start of CUS-type acceleration ramp rounded as a percentage of total ramp time (ACC or AC2). 0 to 100% 10% FUn- HSP t 0 t2 t1 f (Hz) HSP t 0 t2 t1 f (Hz) HSP t 0 tA1 tA2 tA3 tA4 ACC or AC2 f (Hz) HSP t 0 dEC or dE2 f (Hz) HSP t 0 t2 t1 f (Hz) HSP t 0 t2 t1 f (Hz) U ramps Customized ramps These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
  • 50. Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04 Application Functions Menu FUn- 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved50 Sub-menu Parameter Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting rPC- (continued) tA2 End of CUS-type acceleration ramp rounded as a percentage of total ramp time (ACC or AC2) 0 to (100% - tA1) 10% tA3 Start of CUS-type deceleration ramp rounded as a percentage of total ramp time (dEC or dE2) 0 to 100% 10% tA4 End of CUS-type deceleration ramp as a percentage of total ramp time (dEC or dE2) 0 to (100% - tA3) 10% ACC dEC Acceleration and deceleration ramp times1 0.1 to 999.9 s 3 s Acceleration ramp time for the motor to go from 0 Hz to FrS (parameter in the drC- menu, see page 28). Deceleration ramp time for the motor to go from FrS to 0 Hz. Ensure that the value of dEC is not set too low for the load. rPS Ramp switching See below. nO This function remains active regardless of the control channel. nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word ACC and dEC are enabled when the logic input or control word bit is in state 0. AC2 and dE2 are enabled when the logic input or control word bit is in state 1. Frt Ramp switching threshold 0 to 500 Hz 0 The second ramp is switched if the value of Frt is not equal to 0 and the output frequency is greater than Frt. Setting Frt to 0 deactivates it. Ramp switching threshold can be combined with switching via a logic input or a control word bit as follows: AC2 2nd acceleration ramp time1 : Enabled via logic input (rPS) or frequency threshold (Frt). 0.1 to 999.9 s 5 s dE2 2nd deceleration ramp time1 : Enabled via logic input (rPS) or frequency threshold (Frt). 0.1 to 999.9 s 5 s brA Deceleration ramp adaptation See below. YES Activating this function automatically adapts the deceleration ramp if it has been set at too low a value for the inertia of the load. nO: Function inactive YES: Function active brA is incompatible with applications requiring positioning on a ramp or the use of a braking resistor. brA is forced to nO if brake control (bLC) is assigned (page 70). 1 Can also be accessed in the Settings menu, SEt-. See page 23. FUn- LI or bit Frequency Ramp 0 0 1 1 <Frt >Frt <Frt >Frt ACC, dEC AC2, dE2 AC2, dE2 AC2, dE2 These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
  • 51. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus 06/2004 Application Functions Menu FUn- © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 51 Sub-menu Parameter Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting StC- Stop modes Stt Normal stop type See below. RMP Type of stop executed when the run command disappears or a stop command appears. rNP: Follow ramp FSt: Fast stop nSt: Freewheel stop dCI: DC injection stop FSt Fast stop via logic input See below. nO nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Fast stop is activated when the state of the logic input changes to 0 or the control word bit changes to 1. Fast stop is a stop on the deceleration reduced by the coefficient specified by parameter dCF. If the logic input falls back to state 1 and the run command is still active, the motor will only restart if 2-wire control is configured (tCC = 2C and tCt = LEL or PFO, see page 31). Otherwise, a new run command must be sent. dCF Coefficient for dividing the deceleration ramp time for fast stopping. 0, 1 to 10 4 This parameter only appears if FST is assigned. Ensure that the reduced ramp is not too low for the load. The value 0 corresponds to the minimum ramp. dCI DC injection via logic input See below. nO nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Braking is activated when the state of the logic input or control word bit is 1. IdC Level of DC injection braking current activated via logic input or selected as stop mode 1, 2 0 to In 3 0.7 In 3 After 5 seconds, the injection current is peak limited at 0.5 Ith. tdC Total DC injection braking time when dCI is selected as the normal stop type (see Stt above). 1, 2 0.1 to 30 s 0.5 s 1 Can also be accessed in the Settings menu, SEt-. See page 23. 2 These settings are not related to the automatic DC injection function. 3 In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the ATV31 Installation Manual and on the drive controller nameplate. FUn- These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
  • 52. Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04 Application Functions Menu FUn- 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved52 Sub-menu Parameter Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting StC- (continued) nSt Freewheel stop via logic input nO nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 Freewheel stop is activated when the logic input is at state 0. If the input returns to state 1 and the run command is still active, the motor will only restart if 2-wire control is configured. Otherwise, a new run command must be sent. FUn- WARNING NO HOLDING TORQUE • DC injection braking does not provide holding torque at zero speed. • DC injection braking does not function during a loss of power or during a drive controller fault. • When required, use a separate brake for holding torque. EXCESSIVE DC INJECTION BRAKING • Application of DC injection braking for long periods of time can cause motor overheating and damage. • Protect the motor from extended periods of DC injection braking. Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
  • 53. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus 06/2004 Application Functions Menu FUn- © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 53 Sub-menu Parameter Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting AdC- Automatic DC injection. See page 51. AdC Automatic DC injection (at the end of the ramp) See below. YES nO: No injection YES: DC injection for an adjustable period Ct: Continuous DC injection NOTE: If this parameter is set to Yes or Ct, DC current is injected even if a run command has not been sent. The parameter can be accessed with the drive controller running. tdC1 Automatic injection time 1 0.1 to 30 s 0.5 s SdC1 Level of automatic DC injection current 1 0 to 1.2 In 2 0.7 In 2 Note: Ensure that the motor will withstand this current without overheating. tdC2 2nd automatic DC injection time 1 0 to 30 s 0 s SdC2 2nd level of automatic DC injection current 1 0 to 1.2 In 2 0.5 In 2 NOTE: Ensure that the motor will withstand this current without overheating. 1 Can also be accessed in the Settings menu, SEt-. See page 23. 2 In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the ATV31 Installation Manual and on the drive controller nameplate. FUn- AdC SdC2 Operation YES x Ct ≠ 0 Ct = 0 Run command Speed t SdC1 SdC2 tdC1 tdC1 + tdC2 I t SdC1 I t SdC1 SdC2 tdC1 I t 0 t 1 0 These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
  • 54. Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04 Application Functions Menu FUn- 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved54 Summing Inputs Refer to the diagrams on pages 39 and 41. Sub-menu Parameter Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting SAI- Summing inputs Can be used to sum one or two inputs with reference Fr1. SA2 Summing input 2 See below. AI2 nO: Not assigned AI1: Analog input AI1 AI2: Analog input AI2 AI3: Analog input AI3 AIP: Potentiometer (ATV31••••••A drive controllers only) If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: Ndb: Reference via Modbus CAn: Reference via CANopen LCC: Reference via the remote keypad display, LFr parameter in the SEt- menu page 24. SA3 Summing input 3 See below. nO nO: Not assigned AI1: Analog input AI1 AI2: Analog input AI2 AI3: Analog input AI3 AIP: Potentiometer (ATV31••••••A drive controllers only) If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: Ndb: Reference via Modbus CAn: Reference via CANopen LCC: Reference via the remote keypad display (LFr parameter in the SEt- menu. See page 24.) FUn- SA2 SA3 Fr1 NOTE: AI2 is an input, ± 10 V, which can allow a subtraction by summing a negative signal.
  • 55. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus 06/2004 Application Functions Menu FUn- © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 55 Preset Speeds Parameter PSS, preset speeds, allows 2, 4, 8, or 16 preset speeds, requiring 1, 2, 3, or 4 logic inputs respectively. The preset speeds must be assigned in the following order: PS2, then PS4, then PS8, then PS16. Refer to the following table for combining inputs to activate the various preset speeds: 16 speeds LI (PS16) 8 speeds LI (PS8) 4 speeds LI (PS4) 2 speeds LI (PS2) Speed reference 0 0 0 0 Reference 1 1 See the diagrams on page 39 and page 41: Reference 1 = (SP1). 0 0 0 1 SP2 0 0 1 0 SP3 0 0 1 1 SP4 0 1 0 0 SP5 0 1 0 1 SP6 0 1 1 0 SP7 0 1 1 1 SP8 1 0 0 0 SP9 1 0 0 1 SP10 1 0 1 0 SP11 1 0 1 1 SP12 1 1 0 0 SP13 1 1 0 1 SP14 1 1 1 0 SP15 1 1 1 1 SP16
  • 56. Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04 Application Functions Menu FUn- 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved56 Sub-menu Parameter Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting PSS- Preset speeds PS2 2 preset speeds See below. If tCC = 2C: LI3 If tCC = 3C: nO If tCC = LOC: LI3 Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word PS4 4 preset speeds See below. If tCC = 2C: LI4 If tCC = 3C: nO If tCC = LOC: LI4 Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. NOTE: Ensure that PS2 has been assigned before assigning PS4. nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word PS8 8 preset speeds See below. nO Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. NOTE: Ensure that PS4 has been assigned before assigning PS8. nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word FUn-
  • 57. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus 06/2004 Application Functions Menu FUn- © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 57 Sub-menu Parameter Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting PS16 16 preset speeds See below. nO Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. NOTE: Ensure that PS8 has been assigned before assigning PS16. nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word SP2 2nd preset speed 1 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 10 Hz SP3 3rd preset speed 1 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 15 Hz SP4 4th preset speed 1 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 20 Hz SP5 5th preset speed 1 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 25 Hz SP6 6th preset speed 1 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 30 Hz SP7 7th preset speed 1 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 35 Hz SP8 8th preset speed 1 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 40 Hz SP9 9th preset speed 1 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 45 Hz SP10 10th preset speed 1 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 50 Hz SP11 11th preset speed 1 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 55 Hz SP12 12th preset speed 1 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 60 Hz SP13 13th preset speed 1 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 70 Hz SP14 14th preset speed 1 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 80 Hz SP15 15th preset speed 1 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 90 Hz SP16 16th preset speed 1 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 100 Hz 1 Can also be accessed in the Settings menu, SEt-. See page 23. FUn- These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
  • 58. Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04 Application Functions Menu FUn- 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved58 Sub-menu Parameter Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting JOG- Jog operation JOG Jog operation See below. If tCC = 2C: nO If tCC = 3C: LI4 If tCC = LOC: nO Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 Example: 2-wire control operation (tCC = 2C) JGF Jog operation reference 1 0 to 10 Hz 10 Hz 1 Can also be accessed in the Settings menu, SEt-. See page 23. FUn- 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 Ramp forced to 0.1 s Reference JGF reference JGF reference LI (JOG) Forward Reverse Ramp DEC/DE2 Motor frequency ≥ 0.5 s
  • 59. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus 06/2004 Application Functions Menu FUn- © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 59 +/- Speed This function can only be accessed if: 1. Parameter LAC is set to L2 or L3 (see page 44). 2. Incompatible functions are not active (see page 19). 3. Parameter Fr1 or Fr2 is set to UPdt or UPdH. The following sections describe two types of +/- speed operation: use of single action buttons and use of double action buttons. A pendant station is an example application of both. Single Action Buttons Single action buttons require two logic inputs and two directions of rotation. The input assigned to the + speed command increases the speed, the input assigned to the - speed command decreases the speed. Example of wiring: LI1: forward LIx: reverse LIy: + speed (USP) LIz: - speed (DSP) The maximum speed is set by HSP (see page 24). NOTE: If the reference is switched via rFC (see page 45) from any reference channel to another with +/- speed, the value of reference rFr (after ramp) is copied at the same time. This prevents the speed from being incorrectly reset to zero when switching takes place. - speed speed maintained + speed Forward direction a and d a a and b Reverse direction c and d c c and b LI1 a c b d LIx LIy LIZ ATV31 Control Terminals +24 a a a a a a a a b b c c b d Motor frequency LSP Forward 0 Reverse 0 0 LSP
  • 60. Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04 Application Functions Menu FUn- 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved60 Double Action Buttons Only one logic input, assigned to + speed, is required for double action buttons. Double action buttons typically have two detents. Press the button to the first detent to maintain speed; press it to the second detent to increase speed. Each action closes a contact. Refer to the following table. Example of wiring: LI1: forward LIx: reverse LIy: + speed (USP) Use of double action buttons is incompatible with 3-wire control. The maximum speed is set by HSP (see page 24). NOTE: If the reference is switched via rFC (see page 45) from any reference channel to another with +/- speed, the value of reference rFr (after ramp) is copied at the same time. This prevents the speed from being incorrectly reset to zero when switching takes place. Released (- speed) Press to 1st detent (speed maintained) Press to 2nd detent (+ speed) Forward direction – a a and b Reverse direction – c c and d LI1 a c b d LIx LIy ATV31 Control Terminals + 24 a a a a a a a b b c c d Motor frequency LSP Forward 0 2nd press 1st press Reverse 0 2nd press 1st press 0 LSP
  • 61. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus 06/2004 Application Functions Menu FUn- © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 61 Sub-menu Parameter Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting UPd- +/- Speed (motorized potentiometer) This function can only be accessed if LAC = L2 or L3 and UPdH or UPdt is active (see page 44). USP + Speed Can only be accessed if UPdt is active. See below. nO Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 dSP - Speed Can only be accessed if UPdt is active. See below. nO Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 Str Save reference See below. nO Associated with the +/- speed function, this parameter can be used to save the reference: When the run commands are removed, the reference is saved to RAM. When the mains supply or the run commands are removed, the reference is saved to EEPROM. On the next start-up, the speed reference is the last reference saved. nO: No save rAN: Save to RAM EEP: Save to EEPROM FUn- These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
  • 62. Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04 Application Functions Menu FUn- 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved62 PI Regulator PI regulator provides regulation of a process using feedback from a sensor that sends a signal to the drive controller. This function is often used for pump and fan applications. The PI regulator function is activated by assigning an analog input to PI regulator feedback (PIF). The PI regulator feedback parameter (PIF, see page 66) must be assigned to one of the analog inputs (AI1, AI2, or AI3). The PI reference can be assigned to the following parameters, in order of priority: • Preset references via logic inputs (rP2, rP3, and rP4, see page 66) • Internal reference (rPI, see page 67) • Reference Fr1 (see page 44) Refer to the following table for combining logic inputs for preset PI references. The following parameters can also be accessed in the Settings menu (SEt-, beginning on page 23): • Internal reference (rPI) • Preset references (rP2, rP3, rP4) • Regulator proportional gain (rPG) • Regulator integral gain (rIG) • PI feedback multiplication coefficient (FbS): The FbS parameter can be used to scale the reference to the variation range of the PI feedback (sensor range). For example, Pressure control: PI reference (process) = 0 to 5 bar = 0 to 100% Range of pressure sensor = 0 to 10 bar FbS = Maximum sensor scale / Maximum process FbS = 10 / 5 = 2 rFC HSP FrH rFr LSP (man) (auto) nO AI1 AI2 AI3 Pr2 Pr4 (rP1) nO + - rP2 rP3 rP4 ACC DEC AC2 DE2 rIG rPG PIF PIF 0 tLS rSL FbS x FbS x(-1) x1 nO YESnO YES rPI PIC PII nO AI1 AI2 AI3 LI xxx A B C A Internal reference Reference A Pages 39 and 41 PI feedback Reference B Pages 39 and 41 Preset PI references Error inversion Restart error threshold (wake-up) Gains Ramps Legend: The black square represents the factory setting of parameter xxx. LI (Pr4) LI (Pr2) Pr2 = nO Reference rPI or Fr1 0 0 rPI or Fr1 0 1 rP2 1 0 rP3 1 1 rP4
  • 63. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus 06/2004 Application Functions Menu FUn- © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 63 • rSL parameter: Can be used to set the PI error threshold above which the PI regulator is reactivated (wake-up) after a stop due to the maximum time of operation at low speed being exceeded (tLS). • Reversal of the direction of correction (PIC): If PIC = nO, the speed of the motor increases when the error is positive. An example application is pressure control with a compressor. If PIC = YES, the speed of the motor decreases when the error is positive. An example application is temperature control with a cooling fan.
  • 64. Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04 Application Functions Menu FUn- 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved64 Manual–Automatic Operation with PI Regulator This function combines PI regulator and switching of reference rFC (page 45). The speed reference is given by Fr2 or by the PI function, depending on the state of the logic input. Setting up the PI Regulator 1. Configure the drive controller for PI regulator. See the diagram on page 62. 2. Perform a test with the factory configuration. In most cases, the factory settings are sufficient. To optimize the drive controller, gradually adjust rPG or rIG independently and observe the effect on PI feedback in relation to the reference. 3. If the factory settings are unstable or the reference is incorrect, perform a test with a speed reference in manual mode (without PI regulator) and with the drive controller on load for the speed range of the system: — In steady state, the speed must remain stable at the reference, and the PI feedback signal must be stable. — In transient state, the speed must follow the ramp then stabilize quickly, and the PI feedback must follow the speed. If this is not the case, check the drive controller settings and the sensor signal and cabling. 4. Enable PI regulator. 5. Set brA to nO (no auto-adaptation of the ramp). 6. Set the speed ramps (ACC, dEC) to the minimum permitted by the application without triggering an ObF fault. 7. Set the integral gain (rIG) to the minimum value. 8. Observe the PI feedback and the reference. 9. Perform several RUN/STOP cycles, or vary the load or reference rapidly. 10. Set the proportional gain (rPG) to obtain the ideal compromise between response time and stability in transient phases (slight overshoot and 1 to 2 oscillations before stabilizing). 11. If the reference varies from the preset value in steady state, gradually increase the integral gain (rIG) and reduce the proportional gain (rPG) in the event of instability (pump applications) to find a compromise between response time and static precision. Refer to the figure on page 62. 12. Perform in-production tests throughout the reference range.
  • 65. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus 06/2004 Application Functions Menu FUn- © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 65 The oscillation frequency depends on the application. rPG high Overshoot Stabilization time rPG low Static error Rise time time rIG high rIG low rPG and rIG correct time time Reference Reference Reference Proportional gain Integral gain Parameter Rise Time Overshoot Stabilization Time Static Error rPG = rIG
  • 66. Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04 Application Functions Menu FUn- 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved66 Sub-menu Parameter Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting PI- PI regulator PIF PI regulator feedback See below. nO nO: Not assigned AI1: Analog input AI1 AI2: Analog input AI2 AI3: Analog input AI3 rPG PI regulator proportional gain 1 0.01 to 100 1 Contributes to dynamic performance during rapid changes in the PI feedback. rIG PI regulator integral gain 1 0.01 to 100 1 Contributes to static precision during slow changes in the PI feedback. FbS PI feedback multiplication coefficient 1 0.1 to 100 1 For process adaptation PIC Reversal of the PI regulator direction of correction 1 See below. nO nO: normal YES: reverse Pr2 2 preset PI references See below. nO Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. nO: Not assigned L11: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Pr4 4 preset PI references See below. nO Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. NOTE: Ensure that Pr2 has been assigned before assigning Pr4. nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word rP2 2nd preset PI reference 1 0 to 100% 30% Only appears if Pr2 has been enabled by selecting an input. rP3 3rd preset PI reference 1 0 to 100% 60% Only appears if Pr4 has been enabled by selecting an input. rP4 4th preset PI reference 1 0 to 100% 90% Only appears if Pr4 has been enabled by selecting an input. 1 Can also be accessed in the Settings menu, SEt-. See page 23. FUn- These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
  • 67. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus 06/2004 Application Functions Menu FUn- © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 67 Sub-menu Parameter Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting PI- (continued) rSL Restart after error threshold (wake-up threshold) 0 to 100% 0 If the PI and low speed operating time (tLS, see page 26) functions are configured for the same time, the PI regulator may attempt to set a speed lower than LSP. This results in unsatisfactory operation which consists of a cycle of starting, operating at low speed, then stopping. Parameter rSL (restart error threshold) can be used to set a minimum PI error threshold for restarting after a stop at prolonged LSP. The function is inactive if tLS = 0. PII Internal PI regulator reference nO nO: The PI regulator reference is Fr1, except for UPdH and UPdt (+/- speed cannot be used as the PI regulator reference). YES: The PI regulator reference is parameter rPI. rPI Internal PI regulator reference 1 0 to 100% 0 1 Can also be accessed in the Settings menu, SEt-. See page 23. FUn- These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
  • 68. Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04 Application Functions Menu FUn- 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved68 Brake Control Brake control enables the drive controller to manage an electromagnetic brake. This function can only be accessed if LAC = L2 or L3 (page 40) and no incompatible functions are programmed (see page 19). It can be assigned to relay R2 or to logic output AOC. To prevent jolts, synchronize the brake release with torque build-up during startup, and synchronize the brake engage with zero speed on stopping. Refer to the following figure for braking sequence. The following parameters can be accessed in the FUn- menu (see page 70): • Brake release frequency (brL) • Brake release current (Ibr) • Brake release time (brt) • Brake engage frequency (bEn) • Brake engage time (bEt) • Brake release pulse (bIP) t t t t 0 0 1 Ibr brt 0 bEn 0 1 t 0 bEt brL 1 0 Speed reference Speed reference Motor frequency Relay R2 or logic output AOC LI forward or reverse Motor current Motor speed Engaged Released Brake status
  • 69. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus 06/2004 Application Functions Menu FUn- © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 69 The following are the recommended settings for brake control: 1. Brake release frequency (brL): — Horizontal movement: Set to 0. — Vertical movement: Set to the nominal slip of the motor in Hz. 2. Brake release current (Ibr): — Horizontal movement: Set to 0. — Vertical movement: Set to the nominal current of the motor at first, then adjust the release current to prevent jolting on start-up. Ensure that the maximum load is held when the brake is released. 3. Brake release time (brt): — Adjust according to the type of brake. Brake release time is the time required for the mechanical brake to release. 4. Brake engage frequency (bEn) — Set to twice the nominal slip of the motor, then adjust according to the result. NOTE: The maximum value of bEn is LSP. Ensure that LSP is set to a sufficient value. 5. Brake engage time (bEt): — Adjust according to the type of brake. This is the time required for the mechanical brake to engage. 6. Brake release pulse (bIP): — Horizontal movement: Set to nO. — Vertical movement: Set to YES and ensure that the motor torque direction for forward control corresponds to the upward direction of the load. If necessary, reverse two motor phases. This parameter generates motor torque in an upward direction, regardless of the direction of operation, to maintain the load while the brake is releasing.
  • 70. Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04 Application Functions Menu FUn- 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved70 Sub-menu Parameter Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting bLC- Brake control This function can only be accessed if LAC = L2 or L3 (page 40). bLC Brake control configuration See below. nO nO: Not assigned r2: Relay R2 dO: Logic output AOC If bLC is assigned, parameter FLr (page 78) and brA (page 50) are forced to nO, and parameter OPL (page 78) is forced to YES. brL Brake release frequency 0.0 to 10.0 Hz Varies with drive controller rating Ibr Motor current threshold for brake release 0 to 1.36 In 1 Varies with drive controller rating brt Brake release time 0 to 5 s 0.5 s LSP Low speed 0 to HSP (page 24) 0 Hz Motor frequency at minimum reference. This parameter can also be modified in the SEt- menu (page 24). bEn Brake engage frequency threshold nO, 0 to LSP Hz nO nO: Not set If bLC is assigned and bEn = nO, the drive controller will trip on bLF fault at start-up. bEt Brake engage time 0 to 5 s 0.5s bIP Brake release pulse See below. nO nO: While the brake is releasing, the motor torque direction corresponds to the commanded direction of rotation. YES: While the brake is releasing, the motor torque direction is always forward, regardless of the commanded direction of rotation. Ensure that the motor torque direction for Forward control corresponds to the upward direction of the load. If necessary, reverse two motor phases. 1 In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the ATV31 Installation Manual and on the drive controller nameplate. FUn- These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
  • 71. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus 06/2004 Application Functions Menu FUn- © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 71 Sub-menu Parameter Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting LC2- Switching for second current limit This function can only be accessed if LAC = L2 or L3 (page 40). LC2 Switching for second current limit See below. nO Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word CL1 is enabled when the logic input or control word bit is in state 0 (SEt- menu page 26). CL2 is enabled when the logic input or control word bit is in state 1. CL2 2nd current limit 1 0.25 to 1.5 In 2 1.5 In 2 1 Can also be accessed in the Settings menu, SEt-. See page 23. 2 In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the ATV31 Installation Manual and on the drive controller nameplate. FUn- These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
  • 72. Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04 Application Functions Menu FUn- 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved72 Sub-menu Parameter Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting CHP- Motor switching This function can only be accessed if LAC = L2 or L3 (page 40). CHP Switching, motor 2 See below. nO nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word LI or bit = 0: Motor 1 LI or bit = 1: Motor 2 • The motor switching function disables motor thermal protection. An external means of motor thermal protection must be provided. See the caution message on page 12. • If you use this function, do not use the tUn auto-tuning function (page 29) on motor 2 and do not configure tUn to rUn or POn. • Changes to parameters do not take effect until the drive controller is stopped. UnS2 Nominal motor voltage (motor 2) given on the nameplate Varies with drive controller rating Varies with drive controller rating ATV31•••M2: 100 to 240 V ATV31•••M3X: 100 to 240 V ATV31•••N4: 100 to 500 V ATV31•••S6X:100 to 600 V FrS2 Nominal motor frequency (motor 2) given on the nameplate 10 to 500 Hz 50 Hz The ratio must not exceed the following values ATV31•••M2: 7 max. ATV31•••M3X: 7 max ATV31•••N4: 14 max. ATV31•••S6X: 17 max. Changing the setting of bFr to 60 Hz also changes the setting of FrS2 to 60 Hz. nCr2 Nominal motor current (motor 2) given on the nameplate 0.25 to 1.5 In 1 Varies with drive controller rating nSP2 Nominal motor speed (motor 2) given on the nameplate 0 to 32760 RPM Varies with drive controller rating 0 to 9999 rpm, then 10.00 to 32.76 krpm If the nameplate indicates synchronous speed and slip (in Hz or as a percentage) instead of nominal speed, calculate nominal speed as follows: Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x or Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x (50 Hz motors) or Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x (60 Hz motors) 1 In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the ATV31 Installation Manual and on the drive controller nameplate. FUn- UnS (in V) FrS (in Hz) 100 - slip as a% 100 50 - slip in Hz 50 60 - slip in Hz 60 These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
  • 73. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus 06/2004 Application Functions Menu FUn- © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 73 Sub-menu Parameter Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting CHP- (continued) COS2 Motor power factor (motor 2) given on the nameplate 0.5 to 1 Varies with drive controller rating UFt2 Selection of the type of voltage/frequency ratio (motor 2) See below. n L: Constant torque (for motors connected in parallel or special motors) P: Variable torque (pump and fan applications) n: Sensorless flux vector control (for constant torque applications) nLd: Energy savings (for variable torque applications not requiring high dynamics. This behaves in a similar way to the P ratio at no load and the n ratio at load). UFr2 IR compensation/Voltage boost (motor 2) 1 0 to 100% 20 For UFt2 = n or nLd: IR compensation. For UFt2 = L or P: Voltage boost. Used to optimize the torque at low speed. Increase UFr2 if the torque is insufficient. To avoid operating instability, ensure that the value of UFr2 is not too high for a warm motor. Modifying UFt2 causes UFr2 to return to the factory setting (20%). FLG2 Frequency loop gain (motor 2) 1 1 to 100% 20 FLG2 can only be accessed if UFt2 = n or nLd (see page 73).This parameter adjusts the speed ramp based on the inertia of the driven load. If the value is too low, the response time is longer. If the value is too high, overspeed or operating instability can result. StA2 Frequency loop stability (motor 2) 1 1 to 100% 20 StA2 can only be accessed if UFt2 = n or nLd (see page 73). This parameter adapts the return to steady state after a speed transient (acceleration or deceleration) according to the dynamics of the driven machine. Gradually increase the stability to avoid any overspeed. If the value is too low, overspeed or operating instability can result. If the value is too high, the response time is longer. SLP2 Slip compensation (motor 2) 1 0 to 150% 100 SLP2 can only be accessed if UFt2 = n or nLd (see page 73). This parameter adjusts the slip compensation value fixed by nominal motor speed. If the slip setting < actual slip, the motor is not rotating at the correct speed in steady state. If the slip setting > actual slip, the motor is overcompensated and the speed is unstable. 1 Can also be accessed in the Settings menu, SEt-. See page 23. FUn- L UnS FrS n P Voltage Frequency 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 -10 10 20 30 40 0 50 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 -10 10 20 30 40 0 50 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 -10 10 20 30 40 0 50 t Hz t Hz t Hz FLG2 low FLG2 correct FLG2 high In this case, increase FLG2 In this case, reduce FLG2 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 t -10 10 20 30 40 0 50 Hz 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 t -10 10 20 30 40 0 50 Hz 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 t -10 10 20 30 40 0 50 Hz StA2 low StA2 correct StA2 high In this case, increase StA2 In this case, reduce StA2 These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
  • 74. Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04 Application Functions Menu FUn- 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved74 Management of Limit Switches This function can be used to manage the operation of one or two limit switches, in 1 or 2 directions of operation. It can only be accessed if LAC = L2 or L3 (see page 40). To use the function: • Assign one or two logic inputs to forward limit and reverse limit. • Select the type of stop (on ramp, fast, or freewheel stop). After a stop, the motor is permitted to restart in the opposite direction only. • The stop is performed when the input is in state 0. The direction of operation is authorized in state 1. Sub-menu Parameter Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting LSt- Management of limit switches LSt- can only be accessed if LAC = L2 or L3 (page 40). LAF Limit, forward direction See below. nO nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 LAr Limit, reverse direction See below. nO nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 LAS Type of limit switch stop See below. nSt r P: On ramp FSt: Fast stop nSt: Freewheel stop FUn- These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
  • 75. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus 06/2004 Application Functions Menu FUn- © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 75 Sub-menu Parameter Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting SCS Saving the configuration 1 See below. nO nO: Function inactive StrI: Saves the current configuration (but not the result of auto-tuning) to EEPROM. SCS automatically switches to nO as soon as the save is performed. Use this function to keep another configuration in reserve, in addition to the current configuration. The drive controller is factory set with the current configuration and the backup configuration both initialized to the factory configuration. If the remote keypad display is connected to the drive controller, up to four additional settings are available: FIL1, FIL2, FIL3, and FIL4. Use these selections to save up to four configurations in the remote keypad display’s EEPROM memory. SCS automatically switches to nO as soon as the save is performed. FCS Return to factory setting/restore configuration 1 See below. nO nO: Function inactive rECI: Replaces the current configuration with the backup configuration previously saved by SCS (SCS set to Strl). rECI is visible only if the backup configuration has been saved. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action is performed. InI: Replaces the current configuration with the factory settings. FCS automatically switches to nO as soon as this action is performed. If the remote keypad display is connected to the drive controller, up to four additional selections are available corresponding to backup files loaded in the remote keypad display's EEPROM memory: FIL1, FIL2, FIL3, and FIL4. These selections replace the current configuration with the corresponding backup configuration in the remote keypad display. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action is performed. Note: If nAd briefly appears on the display once the parameter has switched to nO, the configuration transfer is not possible and has not been performed (because the controller ratings are different, for example). If ntr briefly appears on the display once the parameter has switched to nO, a configuration transfer error has occurred and the factory settings must be restored using InI. In both cases, check the configuration to be transferred before trying again. NOTE: For rECI, InI, and FIL1 to FIL4 to take effect, you must press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s. 1 SCS and FCS can be accessed via several configuration menus but they concern all menus and parameters as a whole. FUn-
  • 76. Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04 Fault Menu FLt- 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved76 FAULT MENU FLT- Fault Menu parameters can only be modified when the drive is stopped and no run command is present. On the optional remote keypad display, this menu can be accessed with the switch in the position. ESC ENT Atr ENT ESC ENTESC rPr ESC ESC FLt- Automatic restart Operating time reset to zero
  • 77. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus 06/2004 Fault Menu FLt- © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 77 Code Description Factory Setting Atr Automatic restart nO nO: Function inactive YES: Automatic restart after locking on a fault, if the cause of the fault is not longer present and the other operating conditions permit the restart. The restart is performed by a series of automatic attempts separated by increasingly longer waiting periods: 1 s, 5 s, 10 s, then once per minute for the period defined by tAr. If the restart has not taken place once the maximum duration of restart time, tAr, has elapsed, the procedure is aborted and the drive controller remains locked until power is cycled. The following faults permit automatic restart: External fault (EPF) Loss of 4-20 mA reference (LFF) CANopen fault (COF) System overvoltage (OSF) Loss of a line phase (PHF) Loss of a motor phase (OPF) DC bus overvoltage (ObF) Motor overload (OLF) Serial link (SLF) Drive overheating (OHF) This function requires 2-wire control (tCC = 2C) with tCt = LEL or PFO (page 31). Ensure that an automatic restart will not endanger personnel or equipment in any way. Refer to the Warning message below. tAr Maximum duration of restart process 5 minutes 5: 5 minutes 10: 10 minutes 30: 30 minutes 1h: 1 hour 2h: 2 hours 3h: 3 hours Ct: Unlimited This parameter appears if Atr = YES. It can be used to limit the number of consecutive restarts on a recurrent fault. rSF Fault reset no nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled. FLt- WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION • Automatic Restart can only be used for machines or installations that present no danger in the event of automatic restarting, either for personnel or equipment. • If Automatic Restart is active, R1 will only indicate a fault after the restart sequence has timed out. • Equipment operation must conform to national and local safety regulations. Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
  • 78. Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04 Fault Menu FLt- 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved78 Code Description Factory Setting FLr Catch on the fly (automatically catch a spinning load on ramp) nO Enables a smooth restart of a spinning load if the run command is maintained after the following events: • Loss of line supply or disconnection • Fault reset or automatic restart. See the warning on page 77. • Freewheel stop The speed given by the drive controller resumes from the estimated speed of the motor at the time of the restart, then follows the ramp to the reference speed. This function requires 2-wire control (tCC = 2C) with tCt = LEL or PFO. nO: Function inactive YES: Function active When the function is enabled, it activates at each run command, resulting in a slight delay (1 second maximum) before start. FLr is forced to nO if brake control (bLC) is assigned (page 70). EtF External fault nO nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word EPL Stop mode in the event of an external fault (EtF) YES nO: Fault ignored YES: Fault with a freewheel stop rNP: Fault with a stop on the ramp FSt: Fault with a fast stop OPL Configuration of motor phase loss fault YES nO: Function inactive YES: Triggering of OPF fault OAC: No fault is triggered, but output voltage is monitored to avoid an overcurrent when the link with the motor is re-established and a catch on the fly occurs, even if FLr = nO. To be used with a downstream contactor. OPL is forced to YES if brake control (bLC) is assigned (page 70). IPL Configuration of line phase loss fault YES This parameter is only accessible on three-phase drives. nO: Fault ignored YES: Fault with fast stop OHL Stop mode in the event of a drive overheating fault (OHF) YES nO: Fault ignored YES: Fault with a freewheel stop rNP: Fault with a stop on the ramp FSt: Fault with a fast stop OLL Stop mode in the event of a motor overload fault (OLF) YES nO: Fault ignored YES: Fault with a freewheel stop rNP: Fault with a stop on the ramp FSt: Fault with a fast stop FLt-
  • 79. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus 06/2004 Fault Menu FLt- © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 79 Code Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting SLL Stop mode in the event of a Modbus serial link fault (SLF) See below. YES nO: Fault ignored YES: Fault with a freewheel stop rNP: Fault with a stop on the ramp FSt: Fault with a fast stop COL Stop mode in the event of a CANopen serial link fault (COF) See below. YES nO: Fault ignored YES: Fault with a freewheel stop rNP: Fault with a stop on the ramp FSt: Fault with a fast stop tnL Configuration of auto-tuning fault (tnF) See below. YES nO: Fault ignored (the drive controller reverts to the factory settings) YES: Fault with drive controller locked LFL Stop mode in the event of a loss of 4 - 20 mA signal fault (LFF) See below. nO nO: Fault ignored (only value possible if CrL3 ≤3 mA, see page 32) YES: Fault with a freewheel stop LFF: The drive controller switches to the fallback speed (see LFF parameter below) rLS: The drive controller maintains the speed at which it was running when the fault occurred until the fault is no longer present. rNP: Fault with a stop on the ramp FSt: Fault with a fast stop Before setting LFL to YES, rMP, or FSt, check the connection of input AI3. Otherwise, the drive controller may immediately switch to an LFF fault. LFF Fallback speed 0 to 500 Hz 10 Hz Fallback speed setting for stopping in the event of a fault drn Derated operation in the event of an undervoltage See below. nO nO: Function inactive YES: The line voltage monitoring threshold is: ATV31•••M2: 130 V ATV31•••M3X: 130 V ATV31•••N4: 270 V ATV31•••S6X: 340 V In this case, a line choke must be used and the performance of the drive controller cannot be guaranteed. In order to assign this function, you must press and hold down the ENT key for 2 seconds. StP Controlled stop on loss of mains power See below. nO nO: Lock the drive controller and stop the motor on a freewheel NNS: Use the inertia to maintain the drive controller power supply as long as possible rNP: Stop on the active ramp (dEC or dE2) FSt: Fast stop. The stopping time depends on the inertia and the braking ability of the drive controller. InH Fault inhibit See below. nO nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 Fault monitoring is active when the input is in state 0. It is inactive when the input is in state 1. All active faults are reset when the input state changes from 1 to 0. NOTE: To assign this function, you must press and hold down the ENT key for 2 seconds. rPr Operating time reset to zero See below. nO nO: No rtH: Operating time reset to zero The rPr parameter is automatically set to nO as soon as the reset to zero is performed. FLt- CAUTION LOSS OF FAULT PROTECTION Inhibiting faults may damage the drive controller beyond repair by preventing shutdown upon occurrence of a fault. Failure to follow this precaution can result in equipment damage.
  • 80. Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04 Communication Menu COM- 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved80 COMMUNICATION MENU COM- The Communication menu parameters can only be modified when the drive controller is stopped and no run command is present. Modifications to parameters Add, tbr, tFO, AdCO, and bdCO take effect only after a restart. On the optional remote keypad display, this menu can be accessed with the switch in the position. ESC ENT Add ENT ESC ENTESC FLOC ESC ESC CON- Code Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting Add Modbus: Drive address 1 to 247 1 tbr Modbus: Transmission speed 19200 bps 4.8: 4800 bps 9.6: 9600 bps 19.2: 19200 bps NOTE: The remote keypad display can only be used with the transmission speed set to 19200 bps. tFO Modbus communication format See below. 8E1 8O1: 8 data bits, odd parity, 1 stop bit 8E1: 8 data bits, even parity, 1 stop bit 8n1: 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit 8n2: 8 data bits, no parity, 2 stop bits NOTE: The remote keypad display can only be used with the communication format set to 8 data bits, even parity, 1 stop bit. ttO Modbus: Time-out 0.1 to 10 s 10 s AdCO CANopen: Drive address 0 to 127 0 bdCO CANopen: Transmission speed See below. 125 10.0: 10 kbps 20.0: 20 kbps 50.0: 50 kbps 125.0: 125 kbps 250.0: 250 kbps 500.0: 500 kbps 1000: 1000 kbps ErCO CANopen: Error registry (read-only) See below. 0: No error 1: Bus off error 2: Life time error 3: CAN overrun 4: Heartbeat error FLO Forced local mode See below. nO nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 In forced local mode, the terminal block and drive keypad display regain control of the drive controller. CON-
  • 81. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus 06/2004 Communication Menu COM- © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 81 Code Description Adjustment Range Factory Setting FLOC Selection of the reference and control channel in forced local mode Can only be accessed if LAC = 3 See below. AI1 AIP for ATV31••••••A In forced local mode, only the speed reference is taken into account. PI functions, summing inputs, etc. are not active. Refer to the diagrams on pages 40 to 43. AI1: Analog input AI1, logic inputs LI AI2: Analog input AI2, logic inputs LI AI3: Analog input AI3, logic inputs LI AIP: Potentiometer (ATV31••••••A controllers only), RUN/STOP buttons LCC: Remote keypad display: LFr reference (page 24), RUN/STOP/FWD/REV buttons CON- These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
  • 82. Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04 Display Menu SUP- 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved82 DISPLAY MENU SUP- The display menu parameters can be accessed with the drive controller running or stopped. This menu can be accessed with the access locking switch on the remote keypad display in any position. Some functions have numerous parameters. To simplify programming and to keep parameter lists short, these functions have been grouped in sub- menus. Like menus, sub-menus are identified by a dash after their code. For example, LIA- is a submenu. When the drive controller is running, the value of one of the display parameters is shown. To change the parameter displayed, scroll to the desired display parameter and press the ENT key. To retain your selection as the new default, press and hold the ENT key again for 2 seconds. The value of this parameter will be displayed during operation, even after power to the drive controller has been cycled. If the new choice is not confirmed by pressing the ENT key a second time, the drive controller will return to the previous parameter after power is cycled. ENT ESC LFr ENT ENT ESCESC CPU ESC ENT ESC ENT ESC LIA- ESC ESC SUP- Sub-menu
  • 83. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 3: Menus 06/2004 Display Menu SUP- © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 83 Code Description Adjustment Range LFr Frequency reference for control via the drive controller keypad or the remote keypad display 0 to 500 Hz rPI Internal PI reference 0 to 100% FrH Frequency reference before ramp (absolute value) 0 to 500 Hz rFr Output frequency applied to the motor - 500 Hz to + 500 Hz SPd1 or SPd2 or SPd3 Output value in customer units SPd1, SPd2, or SPd3 depending on the SdS parameter, see page 27. Factory setting is SPd3. LCr Motor current Opr Motor power 100% = Nominal motor power, calculated using the parameters entered in the drC- menu. ULn Line voltage (Vac) calculated from the measured voltage on the DC bus tHr Motor thermal state 100% = Nominal thermal state 118% = OLF threshold (motor overload) tHd Drive thermal state 100% = Nominal thermal state 118% = OHF threshold (drive controller overload) LFt Last fault bLF: Brake control fault CFF: Configuration (parameters) incorrect CFI: Configuration (parameters) invalid COF: Communication fault line 2 (CANopen) CrF: Capacitor pre-charge fault EEF: EEPROM memory fault EPF: External fault InF: Internal fault LFF: 4 - 20 mA fault on AI3 nOF: No fault saved ObF: DC bus overvoltage fault OCF: Overcurrent fault OHF: Drive overheating fault OLF: Motor overload fault OPF: Motor phase loss fault OSF: Line supply overvoltage fault PHF: Line supply phase loss fault SCF: Motor short-circuit fault (phase, earth) SLF: Modbus communication fault SOF: Motor overspeed fault tnF: Auto-tuning fault USF: Line supply undervoltage fault Otr Motor torque 100% = Nominal motor torque, calculated using the parameters entered in the drC- menu. rtH Operating time 0 to 65530 hours Total time the motor has been powered up: 0 to 9999 (hours), then 10.00 to 65.53 (khours). Can be reset to zero by the rPr parameter in the FLt- menu (see page 79). SUP- These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
  • 84. Section 3: Menus VVDED303042USR6/04 Display Menu SUP- 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved84 Code Description COd Terminal locking code Allows the drive configuration to be protected with an access locking code. NOTE: Before entering a code, be sure to record it. 0FF: No access locking code • To lock the access, use the key to enter a code (2 to 9999) and press ENT. “ON” appears on the screen to indicate that the parameters have been locked. On: A code (2 to 9999) is locking the access to the drive controller • To unlock the access, use the key to enter the access code (2 to 9999) and press ENT. The code remains on the display and the access is unlocked until the next time the power is removed from the controller. Parameter access will be locked again the next time power is reapplied. • If an incorrect code is entered, the display changes to “ON” and the parameters remain locked. XXXX: Parameter access is unlocked (the code remains on the screen). • To reactivate locking with the same code when the parameters have been unlocked, return to ON. using the button then press ENT. “ON” appears on the screen to indicate that the parameters have been locked. • To lock the access with a new code when the parameters have been unlocked, enter a new code (increment the display using or ) and press ENT. “ON” appears on the screen to indicate that the parameters have been locked. • To clear locking when the parameters have been unlocked, return to OFF using the button and press ENT. “OFF” remains on the screen. The parameters are unlocked and will remain unlocked. When the access is locked using a code, only the display parameters are accessible, with only a temporary choice of the parameter displayed. tUS Auto-tuning status. See page 29. tAb: The default stator resistance value is used to control the motor. PEnd: Auto-tuning has been requested, but not yet performed. PrOG: Auto-tuning in progress. FAIL: Auto-tuning has failed. dOnE: Auto-tuning is complete. The stator resistance measured by the auto-tuning function is used to control the motor. Strd: Auto-tuning is complete. The cold stator resistance (rSC other than nO) is used to control the motor. UdP Indicates the ATV31 firmware version. For example, 1102 = V1.1 IE02. LIA- Logic input functions LI1A LI2A LI3A LI4A LI5A LI6A Can be used to display the functions assigned to each input. If no functions are assigned, nO is displayed. Use and to scroll through the functions. If a number of functions have been assigned to the same input, ensure that they are compatible. LIS Can be used to display the state of the logic inputs (using the segments of the display: high = 1, low = 0) Example above: LI1 and LI6 are at 1, LI2–LI5 are at 0. AIA- Analog input functions AI1A AI2A AI3A Can be used to display the functions assigned to each input. If no functions have been assigned, nO is displayed. Use and to scroll through the functions. If a number of functions are assigned to the same input, ensure that they are compatible. SUP- State 1 State 0 LI1 LI2 LI3 LI4 LI5 LI6
  • 85. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 4: Maintenance and Troubleshooting 06/2004 Precautions © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 85 SECTION 4: MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING PRECAUTIONS Read the following safety statements before proceeding with any maintenance or troubleshooting procedures. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE Perform the following steps at regular intervals: • Check the condition and tightness of the connections. • Make sure that the ventilation is effective and that the temperature around the drive controller remains at an acceptable level. • Remove dust and debris from the drive controller, if necessary. NORMAL DISPLAY A normal display with no fault present and no run command shows: • The value of one of the display parameters (see page 82). • init: Initialization sequence • rdY: Drive ready • dcb: DC injection braking in progress • nSt: Freewheel stop. See page 15. • FSt: Fast stop • tUn: Auto-tuning in progress FAULT DISPLAY If a problem arises during setup or operation, ensure that all ambient environment, mounting, and connection recommendations have been followed. The first fault detected is stored and displayed, flashing, on the screen. The drive controller locks and the fault relay (RA-RC) contact opens, if it has been configured for this function. Drive Controller Does Not Start, No Fault Displayed If the drive controller will not start and there is no display indication, consider the following: 1. Check the power supply to the drive controller. 2. The assignment of the fast stop or freewheel stop functions prevents the drive controller from starting if the corresponding logic inputs are not powered up. In this case, the drive controller displays nSt in freewheel stop mode and FSt in fast mode. This is normal, since these functions are active at zero speed so that the drive controller will stop safely if there is a wire break. 3. Ensure that the run command inputs have been actuated in accordance with the chosen control mode (tCC parameter in the I-O- menu. See page 31). DANGER HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE • Disconnect all power before servicing the drive controller. • Read and understand these procedure and the precaution on page 14 of this manual before servicing the ATV31 drive controllers. • Installation, adjustment, and maintenance of these drive controllers must be performed by qualified personnel. Failure to follow this instruction will result in death or serious injury.
  • 86. Section 4: Maintenance and Troubleshooting VVDED303042USR6/04 Fault Display 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved86 4. If an input is assigned to the limit switch function and this input is at state 0, the drive controller can only be started by sending a command for the opposite direction (see page 74). 5. If the reference channel (page 39) or the control channel (page 40) is assigned to Modbus or CANopen, the drive controller displays nSt on power up and remains stopped until the communication bus sends a command. Clearing Faults The drive controller can be unlocked after a fault by the following methods: • Removing power from the drive controller until the display clears. • Automatically, if the automatic restart function is enabled (parameter Atr is set to Yes, see page 77) • By a logic input, if a logic input is assigned to the fault reset function (parameter rSF assigned to LI•, see page 77) Faults Which Cannot Be Automatically Reset Faults which cannot be automatically reset are listed in the table below. To clear these faults: 1. Remove power from the drive controller. 2. Wait for the display to go off completely. 3. Determine the cause of the fault and correct it. 4. Reapply power. bLF, CrF, OCF, SOF, and tnF can also be reset remotely via a logic input. Refer to the rSF parameter on page 77. Fault Probable Cause Remedy bLF Brake sequence Brake release current not reached • Check the drive controller and motor connections. • Check the motor windings. • Check the Ibr setting in the FUn- menu. Refer to page 70. CrF Precharge circuit fault Precharge circuit damaged • Reset the drive controller. • Replace the drive controller. InF Internal fault • Internal fault • Internal connection fault • Remove sources of electromagnetic interference. • Replace the drive controller. OCF Overcurrent • Incorrect parameter settings in the SEt- and drC- menus • Acceleration too rapid • Drive controller and/or motor undersized for load • Mechanical blockage • Check the SEt- and drC- parameters. • Ensure that the size of the motor and drive controller is sufficient for the load. • Clear the mechanical blockage. SCF Motor short circuit • Short circuit or grounding at the drive controller output • Significant ground leakage current at the drive controller output if several motors are connected in parallel • Check the cables connecting the drive controller to the motor, and check the motor insulation. • Reduce the switching frequency. • Connect output filters in series with the motor. SOF Overspeed • Instability • Overhauling load • Check the motor, gain, and stability parameters. • Add a braking resistor. • Check the size of the motor, drive controller, and load. tnF Auto-tuning fault • Motor or motor power not suitable for the drive controller • Motor not connected to the drive controller • Use the L or the P ratio (see UFt on page 29). • Check the presence of the motor during auto-tuning. • If a downstream contactor is being used, close it during auto- tuning.
  • 87. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 4: Maintenance and Troubleshooting 06/2004 Fault Display © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 87 Faults Which Can Be Automatically Reset After the cause of the fault has been removed, the faults in the table below can be reset: • With the automatic restart function. Refer to the Atr parameter in the FLt- menu on page 77. • Via a logic input. Refer to the rSF parameter in the FLt- menu on page 77. • By cycling power to the drive controller. Fault Probable Cause Remedy COF Serial link failure CANopen Loss of communication between the drive controller and communication device or remote keypad. • Check the communication bus. • Refer to the product-specific documentation. EPF External fault User defined User defined LFF Loss of 4-20 mA follower Loss of the 4-20 mA reference on input AI3 Check the connection on input AI3. ObF Overvoltage during deceleration • Braking too rapidly • Overhauling load • Increase the deceleration time. • Install a braking resistor if necessary. • Activate the brA function if it is compatible with the application. Refer to page 50. OHF Drive overload • Drive controller or ambient temperature are too high. • Continuous motor current load is too high. Check the motor load, the drive controller ventilation, and the environment. Wait for the drive controller to cool before restarting. OLF Motor overload • Thermal trip due to prolonged motor overload • Motor power rating too low for the application Check the ItH setting (motor thermal protection, page 24), check the motor load. Allow the motor to cool before restarting. OPF Motor phase failure • Loss of phase at drive controller output • Downstream contactor open • Motor not connected • Instability in the motor current • Drive controller oversized for motor • Check the connections from the drive controller to the motor. • If a downstream contactor is being used, set OPL to OAC. Refer to page 78. • Test the drive controller on a low power motor or without a motor: set OPL to nO. Refer to page 78. • Check and optimize the UFr (page 25), UnS (page 28), and nCr (page 28) parameters and perform auto-tuning (page 29). OSF Overvoltage during steady state operation or during acceleration • Line voltage too high • Line supply transients • Check the line voltage. Compare with the drive controller nameplate rating. • Reset the drive controller. PHF Input phase failure • Input phase loss, blown fuse • Three-phase drive controller used on a single phase line supply • Input phase imbalance • Transient phase fault NOTE: This protection only operates with the drive controller running under load. • Check the connections and the fuses. • Disable the fault by setting IPL to nO. Refer to page 78. • Verify that the input power is correct. • Supply three-phase power if needed. SLF Serial link failure Modbus Loss of connection between the drive controller and the communication device or the remote keypad display. • Check the communication connection. • Refer to the product-specific documentation.
  • 88. Section 4: Maintenance and Troubleshooting VVDED303042USR6/04 Configuration Settings Tables 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved88 Faults That Reset When the Fault Is Cleared CONFIGURATION SETTINGS TABLES Use the configuration settings tables beginning on page 89 to prepare and record the configuration before programming the drive controller. It is always possible to return to the factory settings by setting the FCS parameter to Init in the drC-, I-O-, CtL-, or FUn- menus. See pages 30, 33, 47, or 75. Fault Probable Cause Remedy CFF Configuration fault The parameter configurations are not suited to the application. Restore the factory settings or load the backup configuration, if it is valid. See parameter FCS in the drC- menu, page 33. CFI Configuration fault via serial link The parameter configurations loaded in the drive controller via the serial link are not suited to the application. • Check the configuration loaded previously. • Load a compatible configuration. USF Undervoltage • Line supply too low • Transient voltage dip • Damaged precharge resistor • Check the line voltage. • Check the setting of the UNS parameter. See page 28. • Replace the drive controller.
  • 89. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 4: Maintenance and Troubleshooting 06/2004 Configuration Settings Tables © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 89 Drive Controller and Customer ID Drive Controller ATV31................................................................................... Customer ID no. (if applicable)........................................................................ 1st Level Adjustment Parameter Settings Menu Code Factory Setting Custom Setting bFr 50 bFr SEt- Code Factory Setting Custom Setting Code Factory Setting Custom Setting ACC 3 s s rP2 30% % AC2 5 s s rP3 60% % dE2 5 s s rP4 90% % dEC 3 s s SP2 10 Hz Hz tA1 10% % SP3 15 Hz Hz tA2 10% % SP4 20 Hz Hz tA3 10% % SP5 25 Hz Hz tA4 10% % SP6 30 Hz Hz LSP 0 Hz Hz SP7 35 Hz Hz HSP bFr Hz SP8 40 Hz Hz ItH According to drive rating A SP9 45 Hz Hz UFr 20% % SP10 50 Hz Hz FLG 20% % SP11 55 HZ Hz StA 20% % SP12 60 Hz Hz SLP 100 Hz % SP13 70 Hz Hz IdC 0.7 In (1) A SP14 80 Hz Hz tdC 0.5 s s SP15 90 Hz Hz tdC1 0.5 s s SP16 100 Hz Hz SdC1 0.7 In (1) A CLI 1.5 In 1 A tdC2 0 s s CL2 1.5 In 1 A SdC2 0.5 In (1) A tLS 0 (no time limit) s JPF 0 Hz Hz rSL 0 JF2 0 Hz Hz UFr2 20% % JGF 10 Hz Hz FLG2 20% % rPG 1 StA2 20% % rIG 1 / s / s SLP2 100% % FbS 1 Ftd bFr Hz PIC nO ttd 100% % Ctd In 1 A SdS 30 SFr 4 kHz kHz 1 In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the ATV31 Installation Manual and on the drive controller nameplate. These parameters only appear if the corresponding function is enabled. The majority can also be accessed and adjusted in the function configuration menu. Those which are underlined appear in factory settings mode.
  • 90. Section 4: Maintenance and Troubleshooting VVDED303042USR6/04 Configuration Settings Tables 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved90 Drive Control Menu I/O Menu Control Menu drC- Code Factory Setting Custom Setting Code Factory Setting Custom Setting bFr 50 Hz Hz tUS tAb UnS Varies with drive rating V UFt n FrS 50 Hz Hz nrd YES nCr Varies with drive rating A SFr 4 kHz kHz nSP Varies with drive rating RPM tFr 60 Hz Hz COS Varies with drive rating SSL nO rSC nO I-O- Code Factory Setting Custom Setting Code Factory Setting Custom Setting tCC 2C ATV31••••••A: LOC AO1t 0A tCt trn dO nO rrS if tCC = 2C, LI2 if tCC = 3C, LI3 if tCC = LOC: nO r1 FLt CrL3 4 mA mA r2 nO CrH3 20 mA mA CtL- Code Factory Setting Custom Setting Code Factory Setting Custom Setting LAC L1 Cd2 Mdb Fr1 AI1 AIP for ATV31••••••A CCS Cd1 Fr2 nO COp nO rFC Fr1 LCC nO CHCF SIM PSt YES Cd1 tEr LOC for ATV31••••••A rOt dFr These parameters only appear if the corresponding function is enabled.
  • 91. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 4: Maintenance and Troubleshooting 06/2004 Configuration Settings Tables © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 91 Application Functions Menu Code Factory Setting Custom Setting Code Factory Setting Custom Setting rPC- rPt LIn JOG- JOG If tCC = 2C: nO If tCC = 3C: LI4 If tCC = LOC: nO tA1 10% % JGF 10 Hz Hz tA2 10% % UPd- USP nO tA3 10% % dSP nO tA4 10% % Str nO ACC 3 s s PI- PIF nO dEC 3 s s rPG 1 rPS nO rIG 1 Frt 0 Hz FbS 1 AC2 5 s s PIC nO dE2 5 s s Pr2 nO brA YES Pr4 nO StC- Stt Stn rP2 30% % FSt nO rP3 60% % dCF 4 rP4 90% % dCI nO rSL 0 IdC 0.7 In A PII nO tdC 0.5 s s rPI 0% % nSt nO bLC- bLC nO AdC- AdC YES brL Varies with drive controller rating Hz tdC1 0.5 s s Ibr A SdC1 0.7 In 1 A brt 0.5 s s tdC2 0 s s bEn nO Hz SdC2 0.5 In 1 A bEt 0.5 s s SAI- SA2 AI2 bIP nO SA3 nO LC2- LC2 nO CL2 1.5 In 1 A 1 In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the ATV31 Installation Manual and on the drive controller nameplate. FUn- These parameters only appear if the corresponding function is enabled. They can also be accessed in the SEt- menu.
  • 92. Section 4: Maintenance and Troubleshooting VVDED303042USR6/04 Configuration Settings Tables 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved92 Application Functions Menu (Continued) Code Factory Setting Custom Setting Code Factory Setting Custom Setting PSS- PS2 If tCC = 2C: LI3 If tCC = 3C: LI4 If tCC = LOC: LI3 CHP- CHP nO PS4 If tCC = 2C: LI4 If tCC = 3C: nO If tCC = LOC: LI4 UnS2 Varies with drive controller rating V PS8 nO FrS2 50 Hz Hz PS16 nO nCr2 Varies with drive controller rating A SP2 10 Hz Hz nSP2 RPM SP3 15 Hz Hz COS2 SP4 20 Hz Hz UFt2 n SP5 25 Hz Hz UFr2 20% % SP6 30 Hz Hz FLG2 20% % SP7 35 Hz Hz StA2 20% % SP8 40 Hz Hz SLP2 100 Hz Hz SP9 45 Hz Hz LSt- LAF nO SP10 50 Hz Hz LAr nO SP11 55 Hz Hz LAS nSt SP12 60 Hz Hz SP13 70 Hz Hz SP14 80 Hz Hz SP15 90 Hz Hz SP16 100 Hz Hz FUn- These parameters only appear if the corresponding function is enabled. They can also be accessed in the SEt menu.
  • 93. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 4: Maintenance and Troubleshooting 06/2004 Configuration Settings Tables © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 93 Fault Menu Communication Menu FLt- Code Factory Setting Custom Setting Code Factory Setting Custom Setting Atr nO SLL YES tAr 5 COL YES rSF nO tnL YES FLr nO LFL nO EtF nO LFF 10 Hz Hz EPL YES drn nO OPL YES StP nO IPL YES InH nO OHL YES rPr nO OLL YES These parameters only appear if the corresponding function is enabled. CON- Code Factory Setting Custom Setting Code Factory Setting Custom Setting Add 1 bdCO 125 tbr 19200 FLO nO tFO 8E1 FLOC AI1 AIP for ATV31••••••AttO 10 s s AdCO 0
  • 94. Section 4: Maintenance and Troubleshooting VVDED303042USR6/04 Index of Parameter Codes 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved94 INDEX OF PARAMETER CODES Code See Page: AC2 24 ACC 24 AdC 53 AdCO 80 Add 80 AI1A 84 AI2A 84 AI3A 84 AO1t 84 Atr 77 bdCO 80 bEn 70 bEt 70 bFr 28 bIP 70 bLC 70 brA 50 brL 70 brt 70 CCS 46 Cd1 45 Cd2 45 CHCF 45 CHP 72 CL2 71 CLI 26 COd 84 COp 46 COS 28 COS2 73 CrH3 32 CrL3 32 Ctd 27 dCF 51 dCI 51 dE2 50 dEC 50 dO 32 drn 79 dSP 61 EPL 78 ErCO 80 EtF 78 FbS 26 FCS 30 FLG 25 FLG2 26 FLO 80 FLOC 81 FLr 78 Fr1 44 Fr2 44 FrH 83 FrS 28 FrS2 72 Frt 50 FSt 51 Ftd 27 HSP 24 Ibr 70 IdC 51 InH 79 IPL 78 ItH 24 JF2 26 JGF 26 JOG 58 JPF 26 LAC 44 LAF 74 LAr 74 LAS 74 LC2 71 LCC 46 LCr 83 LFF 79 LFL 79 LFr 83 LFt 83 LI1A 84 LI2A 84 LI3A 84 LI4A 84 LI5A 84 LI6A 84 LIS 84 LSP 24 nCr 28 nCr2 72 nrd 30 nSP 28 nSP2 72 nSt 52 OHL 78 OLL 78 OPL 78 Opr 83 Otr 83 PIC 66 PIF 66 Pr2 66 Pr4 66 PS16 57 PS2 56 PS4 56 PS8 56 PSt 47 r1 32 r2 32 rFC 45 Code See Page: rFr 83 rIG 66 rOt 47 rP2 66 rP3 66 rP4 66 rPG 66 rPI 67 rPI 83 rPr 79 rPS 50 rPt 49 rrS 31 rSC 29 rSF 77 rSL 67 rtH 83 SA2 54 SA3 54 SCS 30 SdC1 53 SdC2 53 SdS 27 SFr 27 SLL 79 SLP 25 SLP2 73 SP10 57 SP11 57 SP12 57 SP13 57 SP14 57 SP15 57 SP16 57 SP2 57 SP3 57 SP4 57 SP5 57 SP6 57 SP7 57 SP8 57 SP9 57 SPd1 83 SPd2 83 SPd3 83 SSL 30 StA 25 StA2 73 StP 79 Str 61 Stt 51 tA1 24 tA2 24 tA3 24 tA4 24 Code See Page: tAr 77 tbr 80 tCC 31 tCt 31 tdC 25 tdC1 25 tdC2 25 tFr 30 tHd 83 tHr 83 tLS 26 ttd 27 ttO 80 tUn 29 tUS 29 tUS 84 UdP 84 UFr 25 UFr2 73 UFt 29 UFt2 73 ULn 83 UnS 28 UnS2 72 USP 61 Code See Page:
  • 95. VVDED303042USR6/04 Section 4: Maintenance and Troubleshooting 06/2004 Index of Functions © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 95 INDEX OF FUNCTIONS Function See Page: +/- speed 59 2-wire/3-wire control 31 Analog/logic output AOC/AOV 32 Automatic restart 77 Automatic DC injection 53 Brake control 68 CANopen: Drive address 80 Catch on the fly (automatically catch a spinning load on ramp) 78 Control and reference channels 34 Control channel switching 46 Current limit 26 DC injection via logic input 51 Deceleration ramp adaptation 50 Drive thermal protection 11 Drive ventilation 11 Fast stop via logic input 51 Forced local mode 80 Freewheel stop via logic input 52 Function access level 44 Jog operation 58 Management of limit switch 74 Modbus: Drive address 80 Motor control auto-tuning 29 Motor switching 72 Motor thermal protection 12 Motor thermal protection - max. thermal current 24 PI regulator 62 Preset speeds 55 Ramp switching 50 Ramps 49 Reference switching 45 Relay R1 32 Relay R2 32 Reset of current fault 77 Return to factory settings/restore configuration 30 Saving the configuration 30 Selection of the type of voltage/frequency ratio 29 Skip frequency 26 Stop modes 51 Summing inputs 54 Switching for second current limit 71 Switching frequency 27
  • 96. Section 4: Maintenance and Troubleshooting VVDED303042USR6/04 Index of Functions 06/2004 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved96
  • 98. Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of the use of this material. VVDED303042USR6/04 © 2004 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Replaces VVDED303042US dated 03/2004 8001 Hwy 64 East Raleigh, NC 27545 1-888-SquareD (1-888-778-2733) www.us.SquareD.com 06/2004 Schneider Electric USA Instruction Bulletin Altivar® 31 Programming Manual